WO2015045622A1 - Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state imaging element, and liquid crystal display device - Google Patents

Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state imaging element, and liquid crystal display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015045622A1
WO2015045622A1 PCT/JP2014/070442 JP2014070442W WO2015045622A1 WO 2015045622 A1 WO2015045622 A1 WO 2015045622A1 JP 2014070442 W JP2014070442 W JP 2014070442W WO 2015045622 A1 WO2015045622 A1 WO 2015045622A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
rtp
general formula
color filter
carbon atoms
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/070442
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
樋口 聡
加藤 隆志
藤田 明徳
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to CN201480052638.8A priority Critical patent/CN105593311B/en
Priority to KR1020167008124A priority patent/KR101855237B1/en
Publication of WO2015045622A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015045622A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • C09B11/04Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes derived from triarylmethanes, i.e. central C-atom is substituted by amino, cyano, alkyl
    • C09B11/26Triarylmethane dyes in which at least one of the aromatic nuclei is heterocyclic
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • C09B11/04Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes derived from triarylmethanes, i.e. central C-atom is substituted by amino, cyano, alkyl
    • C09B11/10Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes
    • C09B11/12Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes without any OH group bound to an aryl nucleus
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/02Dyestuff salts, e.g. salts of acid dyes with basic dyes
    • C09B69/06Dyestuff salts, e.g. salts of acid dyes with basic dyes of cationic dyes with organic acids or with inorganic complex acids
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • C09B69/103Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds containing a diaryl- or triarylmethane dye
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • G02B5/223Absorbing filters containing organic substances, e.g. dyes, inks or pigments
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/133509Filters, e.g. light shielding masks
    • G02F1/133514Colour filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/0005Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
    • G03F7/0007Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/032Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
    • G03F7/033Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polymers obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. vinyl polymers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/105Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a colored composition, a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and a liquid crystal display device.
  • a color filter is made into a colored composition by containing a pigment dispersion composition in which an organic pigment or an inorganic pigment is dispersed, a polyfunctional monomer, a polymerization initiator, an alkali-soluble resin, and other components as necessary.
  • a pigment dispersion composition in which an organic pigment or an inorganic pigment is dispersed, a polyfunctional monomer, a polymerization initiator, an alkali-soluble resin, and other components as necessary.
  • This is used to form a colored pattern by a photolithography method, an ink jet method or the like.
  • color filters tend to be used not only for monitors but also for televisions (TVs) in liquid crystal display (LCD) applications.
  • color filters are required to have high color characteristics in terms of chromaticity and contrast.
  • color filters for image sensors solid-state imaging devices
  • color characteristics such as reduction of color unevenness and improvement of color resolution.
  • dyes compounds having a wide variety of chromophores such as phthalocyanine dyes, dipyrromethene dyes, pyrimidine azo dyes, pyrazole azo dyes, xanthene dyes, triarylmethane dyes are known (for example, Patent Documents 2 to 8). See).
  • a coloring composition used for a color filter or the like a composition having more excellent heat resistance, solvent resistance, and voltage holding ratio is required.
  • the object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition that is excellent in heat resistance, solvent resistance, and voltage holding ratio.
  • an object is to provide a useful coloring composition for a blue filter.
  • the colored composition according to ⁇ 1>, wherein the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation is represented by the general formula (TP1) and / or the general formula (TP2).
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72.
  • Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4.
  • Rtp 6 , Rtp Two of 7 and Rtp 8 may be linked to each other to form a ring, and any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a crosslinkable group.
  • At least one selected from the group consisting of a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, a borate anion, PF 6 ⁇ and SbF 6 ⁇ , and -SO 3 -, -COO -, -PO 4 - is selected from at least one selected from structures represented by the structure and the following general formula represented by the following general formula (A1) (A2), ⁇
  • the colored composition according to ⁇ 1>, wherein the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation is represented by the general formula (TP1A) or the general formula (TP2A).
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72.
  • Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4.
  • Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and two of Rtp 8 is, .Rtp 1 ⁇ Rtp 11 with each other linked to the crosslinkable group in any of which may form a ring .Rtp 1 ⁇ Rtp 11, Rtp 71 and Rtp 72, Rt at least one p 71 and Rtp 72, but the general formula (P) may be substituted.
  • General formula (P) (In the general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and X 1 represents —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1).
  • ⁇ 8> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, which is used for forming a colored layer of a color filter.
  • ⁇ 9> A colored cured film obtained by curing the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>.
  • ⁇ 10> A color filter having the colored cured film according to ⁇ 9>.
  • ⁇ 11> A step of applying the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8> onto a support to form a colored composition layer, and a step of exposing the colored composition layer to a pattern. And a step of developing and removing the unexposed portion to form a colored pattern.
  • ⁇ 12> A step of applying a colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8> onto a support to form a colored composition layer and curing to form a colored layer;
  • a method for producing a color filter comprising a step of forming a resist layer, a step of patterning a photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, or a step of dry etching a colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
  • ⁇ 13> A color filter manufactured by the method for manufacturing a color filter according to ⁇ 11> or ⁇ 12>.
  • ⁇ 14> A solid-state imaging device or an image display device having the color filter according to ⁇ 10> or the color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to ⁇ 11> or ⁇ 12>.
  • the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored composition.
  • the description which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • radiation in the present specification means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like.
  • light means actinic rays or radiation.
  • exposure in this specification is not only exposure with far-ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, but also drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Are also included in the exposure.
  • (meth) acrylate represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth) acryl represents both and / or acryl and “(meth) acrylic”
  • "Acryloyl” represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • “monomer” and “monomer” are synonymous.
  • the monomer in this specification is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less.
  • the polymerizable compound means a compound having a polymerizable functional group, and may be a monomer or a polymer.
  • the polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
  • Me in the chemical formula represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Pr represents a propyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
  • the weight average molecular weight in the present invention refers to that measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified.
  • GPC was isolated by removing the solvent from the obtained polymer, and the obtained solid content was diluted to 0.1% by mass with tetrahydrofuran, and HLC-8020 GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) was used.
  • the column can be measured by connecting three TSKgel Super Multipore HZ-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm) in series.
  • the conditions can be performed using a RI detector with a sample concentration of 0.35% by mass, a flow rate of 0.35 mL / min, a sample injection amount of 10 ⁇ L, and a measurement temperature of 40 ° C.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is characterized by containing a colorant containing a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and a counter anion, and a polymerizable compound.
  • a colorant containing a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and a counter anion
  • a polymerizable compound By setting it as such a structure, the coloring composition excellent in heat resistance, solvent resistance, and voltage holding ratio can be provided.
  • the colorant will be described in the order of the first embodiment and the second embodiment.
  • the first embodiment is a case other than the second embodiment described below.
  • the bonding part between the counter aryl group and the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation does not have a covalent bond.
  • the counter anion is directly covalently bonded to a triarylmethane skeleton portion of a triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation, or the counter anion is a triaryl.
  • the counter anion is directly covalently bonded to the methane skeleton portion via a linking group.
  • Triarylmethane Structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and a counter anion will be described.
  • ⁇ Triarylmethane Structure As the crosslinkable group possessed by the triarylmethane structure, a crosslinkable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, an acid, or heat can be used.
  • Specific examples include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, a (meth) acryl group, a styrene group, a vinyl group, an allyl group, and a cyclic ether group, and a (meth) acryl group, a styrene group, and a vinyl group.
  • at least one selected from allyl groups is preferred, at least one selected from (meth) acrylic groups, styrene groups and vinyl groups is more preferred, and (meth) acrylic groups and styrene groups are more preferred.
  • the cyclic ether group is preferably an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group, and more preferably an epoxy group.
  • the molecular weight of the triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation is 2000 or less, preferably 300 to 1500, and more preferably 300 to 900.
  • the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation is preferably represented by the following general formula (TP1) and / or general formula (TP2).
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72.
  • Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4.
  • Rtp 6 , Rtp Two of 7 and Rtp 8 may be linked to each other to form a ring, and any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a crosslinkable group.
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
  • Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 , preferably a hydrogen atom or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 , and more preferably NRtp 71 Rtp 72 .
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms.
  • Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group is preferably unsubstituted.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms.
  • Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 and Rtp 8 each independently represent a substituent.
  • substituents include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms, a carboxyl group, or a sulfo group is preferable, and a linear chain having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • a branched alkyl group, an alkenyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group or a carboxyl group is more preferable.
  • Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 are preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • Rtp 8 preferably has two alkenyl groups bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the ring is preferably a benzene ring.
  • a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and a and b preferably represent 0 or 1, more preferably 0.
  • c preferably represents 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1.
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and are synonymous with Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 in general formula (TP1), and the preferred ranges are also the same. It is.
  • Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 each independently represent a substituent, and are synonymous with Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 in general formula (TP1), and their preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 each independently represent a substituent, and the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later can be used.
  • Rtp 9 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom.
  • Rtp 11 is preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • Rtp 10 represents a substituent, and the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later can be used.
  • Rtp 10 is more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and a and b preferably represent 0 or 1, more preferably 0. c preferably represents 0 to 2, more preferably 0.
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each preferably have a crosslinkable group, and Rtp 71 or Rtp 72 preferably has a crosslinkable group.
  • the group having a crosslinkable group may comprise only a crosslinkable group, or may contain a linking group in addition to the crosslinkable group.
  • the group having a crosslinkable group is preferably a group represented by -L 0 -P 0 .
  • L 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • P 1 represents a crosslinkable group.
  • a crosslinkable group is synonymous with the crosslinkable group mentioned above, and its preferable range is also the same.
  • the divalent linking group includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR. —, —OC—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and a combination of two or more thereof are preferred.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 5 to 20, and particularly preferably 5 to 10. Specifically, a methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, hexylene group, hepsylene group, cyclopentenylene group, cyclohexylene group and the like are preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18, and still more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the arylene group is preferably a phenylene group or a naphthalene group.
  • cations are delocalized as follows, and the following two structures are synonymous, and both are included in the present invention.
  • the cation moiety may be at any position in the molecule.
  • Substituent group A Substituents include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, alkenyl groups, cycloalkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heterocyclic groups, cyano groups, hydroxy groups, nitro groups, carboxyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups.
  • a halogen atom for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom
  • a linear or branched alkyl group a linear or branched substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • a cycloalkyl group preferably substituted with 3 to 30 carbon atoms or Examples thereof include unsubstituted cycloalkyl groups such as cyclohexyl and cyclopentyl, and polycycloalkyl groups such as bicycloalkyl groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl groups having 5 to 30 carbon atoms
  • Linear or branched alkenyl group (straight or branched substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl, oleyl), cycloalkenyl A group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms such as 2-cyclopenten-1-yl and 2-cyclohexen-1-yl, and a polycycloalkenyl group such as bicyclo An alkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] Octo-2-en-4-yl) and tricycloalkenyl groups, with monocyclic cycloalkenyl groups being particularly preferred.
  • Cycloalkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, e.g., ethynyl, propargyl, trimethylsilylethynyl group),
  • An aryl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl, o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl
  • a heterocyclic group preferably 5 to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, more preferably the ring-constituting atom is selected from carbon atom, nitrogen atom and sulfur atom
  • a heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of any one of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkoxy group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, tert-butoxy, n-octyloxy, 2-methoxyethoxy
  • aryloxy group preferably Is a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 2,4-di-tert-amylphenoxy, 4-tert-butylphenoxy, 3-nitrophenoxy, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy
  • silyloxy group preferably a silyloxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as trimethylsilyloxy, tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy
  • a heterocyclic oxy group preferably having a carbon number of 2 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic oxy groups , Heterocyclic portion is preferably described
  • An acyloxy group (preferably a formyloxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formyloxy, acetyloxy , Pivaloyloxy, stearoyloxy, benzoyloxy, p-methoxyphenylcarbonyloxy), a carbamoyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy, N, N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbonyloxy, N, N-di-n-octylaminocarbonyloxy, Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a substituent having 2
  • amino group preferably an amino group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms
  • amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, N-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino acylamino group (preferably formylamino group, carbon number A substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino, benzoylamino, 3, 4,5-tri-n-oc
  • Aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonylamino, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino, mn-octyloxyphenoxycarbonylamino)
  • Sulfamoylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms such as sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, Nn-octylamino Sulfonylamino), alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group (preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atom
  • alkylthio group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methylthio, ethylthio, n-hexadecylthio
  • arylthio group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms
  • the heterocyclic portion described in the above is preferably, for example, 2-benzothiazolylthio, 1-phenyltetrazol-5-ylthio), a sulfamoyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, N-ethylsulfamoyl, N- (3-dodecyloxypropyl) sulfur Moil, N, N- dimethylsulfamoyl, N- acetyl sulfamoyl, N- benzoylsulfamoyl, N- (
  • alkyl or arylsulfinyl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, p-methylphenylsulfinyl
  • an alkyl or arylsulfonyl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfonyl , Ethylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, p-methylphenylsulfonyl
  • alkoxycarbonyl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl
  • a carbamoyl group preferably having a carbon number 1-30 substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl such as carbamoyl, N-methylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N, N-di-n-octylcarbamoyl, N- (methylsulfonyl) carbamoyl), aryl or hetero
  • a ring azo group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylazo group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic azo group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms (the heterocycle portion is the heterocycle
  • a phosphinyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as diphenoxyphosphinyloxy, dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy), a phosphinylamino group ( Preferably, it is a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, for example, dimethoxyphosphinylamino, dimethylaminophosphinylamino), a silyl group (preferably a substitution having 3 to 30 carbon atoms) Or, an unsubstituted silyl group, for example, trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, phenyldimethylsilyl).
  • triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation include the following structures, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the counter anion is a cation counter anion of the triarylmethane structure.
  • the counter anion may consist only of the counter anion or may be included as part of the structure of the compound.
  • examples include a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, a borate anion (BF 4 ⁇ etc.), PF 6 ⁇ and SbF 6 ⁇ .
  • Anions and PF 6 ⁇ are preferred.
  • the counter anion is included as a part of the structure of the compound, there is a case where it exists as a counter anion separately from the triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation and having a molecular weight of 2000 or less.
  • the borate anion is a group represented by B (R 10 ) 4 ⁇ , and R 10 is exemplified by a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a fluorinated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and the like.
  • the case where the counter anion is contained as a part of the structure of the compound may be contained in a part of the polymer having a repeating unit or may be contained in a so-called low molecular compound having a molecular weight of 2000 or less.
  • a low molecular weight compound an embodiment in which at least one of an alkyl group, an aryl group and a crosslinkable group is included together with the anion moiety is exemplified.
  • an embodiment in which the counter anion is contained in the compound containing a crosslinkable group and an embodiment in which the counter anion is contained in the repeating unit are preferred, and an embodiment in which the counter anion is contained in the repeating unit is more preferred. .
  • the anion moiety is —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1), and a general formula (A2) At least one selected from the structure represented by
  • the general formula (A1) is more preferably represented by the following general formula (A1-1).
  • Formula (A1-1) (In General Formula (A1-1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent —SO 2 — or —CO—, and X 1 and X 2 each independently represent an alkylene group or an arylene group. )
  • R 1 and R 2 of the general formula (A1) in the same meaning as R 1 and R 2, and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • X 1 represents an alkylene group
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • X 1 represents an arylene group
  • the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 18, more preferably 6 to 12, and still more preferably 6.
  • X 1 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • X 2 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1.
  • X 2 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
  • R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.
  • Preferably representing the at least two R 3 ⁇ R 5 is -SO 2 - - In formula (A2), at least one of R 3 ⁇ R 5 -SO 2 more preferably represents.
  • the counter anion is included as part of the structure of the compound are R—SO 3 ⁇ , R—COO — or R—PO 4 — , wherein R is substituted with a halogen atom or halogen atom.
  • R is substituted with a halogen atom or halogen atom.
  • examples are an alkyl group which may be substituted and an aryl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • Specific examples of the compound containing the group represented by the general formula (A1) include R 1 as a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, and an aryl which may be substituted with a halogen atom. Examples are compounds bonded to a group.
  • R 4 and R 5 are each substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, or a halogen atom.
  • the case where it is the aryl group which may be made is illustrated.
  • the following embodiments are preferable.
  • Specific examples of other counter anions include the following, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In this specification, the following other specific examples of the counter anion are referred to as “counter anion A”.
  • the crosslinkable group examples include a crosslinkable group that can be cross-linked by a radical, an acid, and heat.
  • the number of crosslinkable groups in the compound containing a crosslinkable group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
  • crosslinkable group and the counter anion may be directly bonded or may be bonded via a linking group, but are preferably bonded via a linking group. It is preferable that the specific example in case a counter anion is contained in the compound containing a crosslinkable group is represented by the following general formula (B).
  • P represents a crosslinkable group.
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Anion represents the counter anion.
  • P represents a crosslinkable group, and examples thereof include the crosslinkable groups described above.
  • L represents a divalent linking group
  • an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms for example, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a trimethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, etc.
  • a carbon number of 6 to 30 arylene groups heterocyclic linking groups, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OC—, —SO —, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
  • the linking group is an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably — (CH 2 ) n— (n is an integer of 1 to 10), an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably a phenylene group or naphthalene). Group), —NH—, —CO—, —O— and —SO 2 — are preferred.
  • ⁇ other functional groups When a counter anion is included as part of the structure of the compound, it may have a functional group other than the crosslinkable group. Other functional groups include other functional groups described in the above-described repeating unit having a triarylmethane structure containing a cation, and preferred examples are also synonymous.
  • the number of polymerizable groups in the compound is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
  • the number of acid groups in the compound is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
  • the molecular weight of the compound containing a crosslinkable group is preferably 200 to 2000, and more preferably 200 to 500.
  • the side chain may have a counter anion
  • the main chain may have a counter anion
  • the main chain and You may have a counter anion in both of the side chains.
  • the anion multimer is preferably represented by the following general formula (C) and / or the following general formula (D).
  • X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Anion represents the counter anion.
  • X 1 represents a main chain of repeating units, usually represents a linking group formed by polymerization reaction, for example, (meth) acrylic, styrene, vinyl and the like are preferable.
  • Two sites represented by * are repeating units.
  • L 1 represents a divalent linking group
  • an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, etc.), an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (phenylene group, Naphthalene group, etc.), heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OC—, —SO —, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
  • L 1 is a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably — (CH 2 ) n— (n is an integer of 5 to 10), an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably phenylene group, naphthalene group) is, - NH -, - CO 2 -, - O- and -SO 2 - is a divalent linking group formed by combining two or more preferred.
  • X 1 and L 1 include the following (XX-1) to (X-30), but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the anion multimer is linked to the counter anion at the site indicated by * in (XX-1) to (X-30).
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 9. Moreover, it represents connecting with the counter anion at the site indicated by *.
  • Formula (D) (In general formula (D), L 2 and L 3 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group. Anion represents the counter anion.)
  • L 2 and L 3 represent a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH— , —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —CO 2 —, —NR—, —CONR—, —O 2 C—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and combinations of two or more thereof
  • the linking group is preferred.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
  • L 2 is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group).
  • the arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • L 3 is preferably a group composed of a combination of an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group) and —O—, and at least one arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is substituted with a fluorine atom. It is preferable.
  • a homopolymer (homopolymer) composed only of a dye compound component having a crosslinkable group or a copolymer (copolymer) with other polymerizable compound is preferably used.
  • a homopolymer (homopolymer) is more preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the anionic multimer is preferably a weight average molecular weight of 3,000 to 30,000 and a molecular weight distribution of Mw / Mn of 0.8 to 3.0, more preferably a weight average molecular weight of 5, The molecular weight distribution is 1 to 2.5 in terms of Mw / Mn.
  • a chain transfer agent When forming an anionic multimer, a chain transfer agent may be added.
  • the chain transfer agent is preferably an alkyl mercaptan, and is preferably an alkyl mercaptan having 10 or less carbon atoms or an alkyl mercaptan substituted with an ether group / ester group. In particular, an alkyl mercaptan having a log P value of 5 or less is more preferable.
  • the amount of the anionic monomer compound having a crosslinkable group that is a raw material of the anionic multimer contained in the anionic multimer is preferably 5% or less, more preferably 1% or less.
  • the halogen ion content contained in the anionic multimer is preferably 10 to 3000 ppm, more preferably 10 to 2000 ppm, and even more preferably 10 to 1000 ppm. Specific examples of the anion multimer are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the counter anion is a polymer, it may have other repeating units.
  • the amount of the anion multimer is preferably from 1 to 50 mol, more preferably from 10 to 30 mol, based on 100 mol of all repeating units in the colorant used in the present invention. Further, when the anionic multimer further contains a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, the amount thereof is, for example, preferably 10 to 50 mol, more preferably 10 to 30 mol, relative to 100 mol of all repeating units.
  • repeating unit having a polymerizable group examples include the following. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing a repeating unit having an acid group is preferably, for example, 10 to 50 mol with respect to 100 mol of all repeating units. More preferred is 30 mol.
  • development accelerators such as lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, —COCH 2 CO—, cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryl groups, polyalkylene oxide groups, hydroxy groups, maleimide groups, amino groups It may contain a repeating unit having a functional group such as an affinity control group.
  • a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation and having a molecular weight of 2000 or less is represented by the general formula (TP1A) or the general formula (TP2A). It is preferred that (In the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72.
  • Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4.
  • Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and two of Rtp 8 is, .Rtp 1 ⁇ Rtp 11 with each other linked to the crosslinkable group in any of which may form a ring .Rtp 1 ⁇ Rtp 11, Rtp 71 and Rtp 72, Rt at least one p 71 and Rtp 72, but the general formula (P) may be substituted.
  • General formula (P) (In the general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and X 1 represents —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1).
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 may be substituted with the general formula (P), the first implementation described above It is synonymous with a triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation in the form, and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • L represents a divalent linking group
  • at least one hydrogen atom of the following groups is a divalent linking group substituted with X 1 .
  • the alkyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkyl groups be divalent.
  • the cycloalkyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • Examples thereof include cyclohexyl and cyclopentyl.
  • a polycycloalkyl group such as a bicycloalkyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [1,2,2] heptan-2-yl, bicyclo [ And 2,2,2] octane-3-yl) and tricyclic groups such as tricycloalkyl groups.
  • a monocyclic cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkyl group are preferable, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group is particularly preferable.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these cycloalkyl groups be divalent.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkenyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl and oleyl are particularly preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkenyl groups be divalent.
  • the cycloalkenyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include 2-cyclopenten-1-yl and 2-cyclohexen-1-yl.
  • a polycycloalkenyl group such as a bicycloalkenyl group, preferably a bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms, such as bicyclo [ 2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] oct-2-en-4-yl and tricycloalkenyl groups, with monocyclic cycloalkenyl groups being particularly preferred .
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these cycloalkenyl groups be divalent.
  • the alkynyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propargyl, and trimethylsilylethynyl groups.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkynyl groups be divalent.
  • the aryl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl and o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl are preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryl groups be divalent.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group. More preferably, the ring-constituting atom is a heterocyclic group selected from a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom, and having at least one heteroatom of any of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom, and more preferably a carbon atom A 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group of 3 to 30.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these heterocyclic groups divalent.
  • the alkoxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and for example, methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, tert-butoxy, n-octyloxy and 2-methoxyethoxy are preferable.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkoxy groups be divalent.
  • the aryloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 2,4-di-tert-amylphenoxy, 4-tert-butylphenoxy, 3 -Nitrophenoxy, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy group is preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryloxy groups be divalent.
  • the silyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted silyloxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as trimethylsilyloxy or tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy group.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these silyloxy groups be divalent.
  • the heterocyclic oxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic oxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocycle moiety is preferably the heterocycle moiety described above for the heterocycle group, and for example, 1-phenyltetrazol-5-oxy and 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy groups are preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these heterocyclic oxy groups be divalent.
  • the acyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these acyloxy groups be divalent.
  • the carbamoyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy, N, N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbonyloxy, N, N-di- n-octylaminocarbonyloxy and Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy groups are preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these acyloxy groups be divalent.
  • the alkoxycarbonyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonyloxy, tert-butoxycarbonyloxy, and n-octylcarbonyloxy group.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkoxycarbonyloxy groups be divalent.
  • the aryloxycarbonyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonyloxy group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonyloxy, p-methoxyphenoxycarbonyloxy, pn-hexadecyloxyphenoxycarbonyloxy group. Is preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryloxycarbonyloxy groups be divalent.
  • the amino group is preferably an amino group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms,
  • amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, N-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino groups are preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these amino groups be divalent.
  • the acylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino Benzoylamino, 3,4,5-tri-n-octyloxyphenylcarbonylamino group is preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these acylamino groups be divalent.
  • the aminocarbonylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aminocarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aminocarbonylamino groups be divalent.
  • the alkoxycarbonylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, tert-butoxycarbonylamino, n-octadecyloxycarbonylamino, N-methyl- A methoxycarbonylamino group is preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkoxycarbonylamino groups be divalent.
  • the aryloxycarbonylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonylamino, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino, and mn-octyloxyphenoxycarbonylamino group. preferable.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryloxycarbonylamino groups be divalent.
  • the sulfamoylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, such as sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, Nn-octylaminosulfonylamino. Groups are preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these sulfamoylamino groups be divalent.
  • the alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms and a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • methylsulfonylamino, butylsulfonylamino, phenylsulfonylamino, 2,3,5-trichlorophenylsulfonylamino, and p-methylphenylsulfonylamino groups are preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkyl or arylsulfonylamino groups be divalent.
  • the alkylthio group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylthio, ethylthio, or n-hexadecylthio group.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkylthio groups be divalent.
  • the arylthio group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenylthio, p-chlorophenylthio, and m-methoxyphenylthio groups.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkylthio groups be divalent.
  • the heterocyclic thio group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic thio group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and the heterocyclic moiety is preferably the heterocyclic moiety described above for the heterocyclic group, for example, 2-benzothiazolyl Ruthio and 1-phenyltetrazol-5-ylthio groups are preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these heterocyclic thio groups be divalent.
  • the sulfamoyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • N-ethylsulfamoyl, N- (3-dodecyloxypropyl) sulfamoyl, N, N-dimethylsulfamoyl, N -Acetylsulfamoyl, N-benzoylsulfamoyl, N- (N′-phenylcarbamoyl) sulfamoyl groups are preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these sulfamoyl groups be divalent.
  • the alkyl or arylsulfinyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, p- A methylphenylsulfinyl group is preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkyl or arylsulfinyl groups be divalent.
  • the alkyl or arylsulfonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, p- A methylphenylsulfonyl group is preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkyl or arylsulfonyl groups be divalent.
  • the acyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-chloroacetyl, stearoyl, benzoyl , Pn-octyloxyphenylcarbonyl group is preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these acyl groups be divalent.
  • the aryloxycarbonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include phenoxycarbonyl, o-chlorophenoxycarbonyl, m-nitrophenoxycarbonyl, and p-tert-butylphenoxycarbonyl group. preferable.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryloxycarbonyl groups be divalent.
  • the alkoxycarbonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, and n-octadecyloxycarbonyl.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkoxycarbonyl groups be divalent.
  • the carbamoyl group is a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as carbamoyl, N-methylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N, N-di-n-octylcarbamoyl, N- (methylsulfonyl)
  • a carbamoyl group is preferred.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these carbamoyl groups be divalent.
  • the aryl or heterocyclic azo group includes a substituted or unsubstituted arylazo group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic azo group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms (the heterocyclic portion is described in the above heterocyclic group).
  • a heterocyclic portion is preferred.
  • phenylazo, p-chlorophenylazo, and 5-ethylthio-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylazo are preferable.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryl or heterocyclic azo groups be divalent.
  • the imide group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted imide group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as N-succinimide and N-phthalimide groups.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these imide groups be divalent.
  • the phosphino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, for example, a dimethylphosphino, diphenylphosphino, or methylphenoxyphosphino group.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these phosphino groups be divalent.
  • the phosphinyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phosphinyl, dioctyloxyphosphinyl, and diethoxyphosphinyl groups.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these phosphinyl groups be divalent.
  • the phosphinyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as diphenoxyphosphinyloxy and dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy groups.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these phosphinyloxy groups be divalent.
  • the phosphinylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as a dimethoxyphosphinylamino or dimethylaminophosphinylamino group.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these phosphinylamino groups be divalent.
  • the silyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted silyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, and phenyldimethylsilyl groups.
  • X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these silyl groups be divalent.
  • L represents a divalent linking group
  • it preferably represents a group consisting of —NR 10 —, —O—, —SO 2 —, a fluorine-substituted alkylene group, a fluorine-substituted phenylene group, or a combination thereof.
  • a group consisting of a combination of —NR 10 —, —SO 2 and a fluorine-substituted alkylene group a group consisting of a combination of —O— and a fluorine-substituted phenylene group, or —NR 10 —, —SO 2 and a fluorine substitution
  • a group consisting of a combination with an alkylene group is preferred.
  • R 10 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the fluorine-substituted alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. These alkylene groups are more preferably perfluoroalkylene groups. Specific examples of the fluorine-substituted alkylene group include a difluoromethylene group, a tetrafluoroethylene group, and a hexafluoropropylene group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the fluorine-substituted phenylene group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • Specific examples of the fluorine-substituted phenylene group include a tetrafluorophenylene group, a hexafluoro-1-naphthylene group, and a hexafluoro-2-naphthylene group.
  • X 1 is a counter anion, —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , a group containing a structure represented by the general formula (A1) and the general formula (A2) It is preferably selected from at least one selected from groups containing the structure represented.
  • the structure represented by the general formula (A1) and the structure represented by the general formula (A2) are synonymous with those described in the first embodiment.
  • the group including the structure represented by the general formula (A1) preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group at one terminal of R 1 and R 2 in the general formula (A1) described above, and R 1 and R 2 More preferably, one of these is directly bonded to a fluorine-substituted alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the fluorine-substituted alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, still more preferably 1 to 3, still more preferably 1 or 2, and particularly preferably 1.
  • These alkyl groups are more preferably perfluoroalkyl groups.
  • a trifluoromethyl group is preferable.
  • R 3 ⁇ R 5 preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group
  • at least two ends of R 3 ⁇ R 5, preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group, and more preferably at least two of R 3 ⁇ R 5 are melted directly fluorine-substituted alkyl group integration.
  • a fluorine-substituted alkyl group is synonymous with what was demonstrated by group containing the structure represented by general formula (A1), and its preferable range is also the same.
  • Other specific examples of X 1 include the counter anion A described above. In this case, any one hydrogen atom or halogen atom constituting the counter anion A is bonded to L in the general formula (P).
  • the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation has a crosslinkable group in any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 in the general formulas (TP1A) and (TP2A),
  • any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 having this crosslinkable group may be further substituted with the general formula (P).
  • the part substituted by general formula (P) may exist only in one place, and may exist in two or more places.
  • there are two or more moieties substituted with the general formula (P) there are a number of cations corresponding to the number of counter anions in addition to the cations contained in the triarylmethane structure in the colorant. To do.
  • the triarylmethane dye used in the present invention can be contained singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the triarylmethane dye is preferably 10 to 60% by mass, and more preferably 10 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain one or more coloring compounds other than the above-described coloring agent, that is, a triarylmethane dye.
  • coloring compounds include dye compounds, pigment compounds, and dispersions thereof.
  • the dye compound may have any structure as long as it does not affect the hue of the colored image.
  • azo for example, Solvent Yellow 162
  • anthraquinone for example, JP-A-2001-10881.
  • Anthraquinone compounds phthalocyanine compounds (for example, phthalocyanine compounds described in US 2008 / 0076044A1)
  • xanthene compounds for example, CI Acid Red 289)
  • Triarylmethane series for example, C.I. Acid Blue 7), C.I. Acid Blue 83 (C.I. Acid Blue 83), C.I. Acid Blue 90 (C.I. Acid Blue 7).
  • I. Acid Blue 90) C.I. Blue 38 (CI Solvent Blue 38), CI Acid Violet 17 (CI Acid Violet 17), CI Acid Violet 49 (CI Acid Violet 49), Sea Eye -Acid green 3 (CI Acid Green3), a methine dye, etc. are mentioned.
  • pigment compounds include perylene, perinone, quinacridone, quinacridonequinone, anthraquinone, anthanthrone, benzimidazolone, disazo condensation, disazo, azo, indanthrone, phthalocyanine, triarylcarbonium, dioxazine, aminoanthraquinone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, Indigo, thioindigo, isoindoline, isoindolinone, pyranthrone, isoviolanthrone and the like.
  • perylene compound pigments such as Pigment Red 190, Pigment Red 224, and Pigment Violet 29, perinone compound pigments such as Pigment Orange 43, and Pigment Red 194, Pigment Violet 19, and Pigment Violet. 42, quinacridone such as Pigment Red 122, Pigment Red 192, Pigment Red 202, Pigment Red 207, or Pigment Red 209, quinacridone compound pigment, Pigment Red 206, Pigment Orange 48, or Pigment Orange 49 Quinone compound pigment, anthraquinone compound pigment such as pigment yellow 147, anthanthrone compound pigment such as pigment red 168, pigment Benzimidazolone compound pigments such as Pigment Brown 25, Pigment Violet 32, Pigment Orange 36, Pigment Yellow 120, Pigment Yellow 180, Pigment Yellow 181, Pigment Orange 62, or Pigment Red 185; Yellow 93, Pigment Yellow 94, Pigment Yellow 95, Pigment Yellow 128, Pigment Yellow 166, Pigment Orange 34, Pigment Orange 13, Pigment Orange 31, Pigment Red 144
  • a color material of green to cyan is preferable, such as Pigment Green 7, Pigment Green 36, Pigment Green 37, Pigment Green 58, Pigment Blue 16, Pigment Blue 75, or Pigment Blue 15.
  • Phthalocyanine compound pigments triarylcarbonium compound pigments such as pigment blue 56 or pigment blue 61, dioxazine compound pigments such as pigment violet 23 or pigment violet 37, aminoanthraquinone compound pigments such as pigment red 177, Pigment Red 254, Pigment Red 255, Pigment Red 264, Pigment Red 272, Pigment Orange 71, Pigment Orange 73, etc.
  • Ketopyrrolopyrrole compound pigments thioindigo compound pigments such as Pigment Red 88, isoindolin compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 139 and Pigment Orange 66, isoindolinone compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 109 or Pigment Orange 61, Pyranthrone compound pigments such as CI Pigment Orange 40 or CI Pigment Red 216, or isoviolanthrone compound pigments such as CI Pigment Violet 31 are preferred.
  • the dye or pigment When the dye or pigment is blended as a dispersion, it can be adjusted according to the descriptions in JP-A-9-197118 and JP-A-2000-239544.
  • the content of the above-mentioned material or pigment can be used as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and is preferably 0.5% by mass to 70% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention. Further, it is preferably added to the coloring composition so that the absorption intensity ratio (absorption at 450 nm / absorption at 650 nm) is in the range of 0.95 to 1.05.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound include addition polymerizable compounds having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • a compound group is widely known in the industrial field, and these can be used without any particular limitation in the present invention.
  • These may be in any chemical form such as, for example, monomers, prepolymers, i.e. dimers, trimers and oligomers, or mixtures thereof and their (co) polymers.
  • Examples of monomers and their (co) polymers include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), their esters, amides, and these (Co) polymers, preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and these (co) polymers It is a polymer.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters amides
  • these (Co) polymers preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and these (co) polymers It is a polymer
  • reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies with unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as hydroxy group, amino group, mercapto group, monofunctional or polyfunctional are also preferably used.
  • an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine, or thiol, and a halogen group A substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable.
  • an ester monomer of an aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid include acrylic acid esters such as ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, tetra Methylene glycol diacrylate, propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, trimethylolethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol Diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate Chryrate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate
  • methacrylic acid esters examples include tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, trimethylolethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, and 1,3-butanediol.
  • itaconic acid esters for example, ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, tetramethylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol Diitaconate, sorbitol tetritaconate, etc., and crotonic acid esters such as ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate, sorbitol tetradicrotonate, etc.
  • ethylene glycol diisocrotonate pentaerythritol diisocrotonate, sorbitol tetraisocrotonate, etc.
  • Le for example, ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate, sorbitol tetra malate, and the like.
  • esters examples include, for example, aliphatic alcohol esters described in JP-B-51-47334 and JP-A-57-196231, JP-A-59-5240, and JP-A-59-5241. And those having an aromatic skeleton described in JP-A-2-226149 and those containing an amino group described in JP-A-1-165613 are preferably used. Furthermore, the ester monomers described above can also be used as a mixture.
  • urethane-based addition-polymerizable compounds produced by the addition reaction of isocyanate and hydroxyl group.
  • Specific examples thereof include, for example, one molecule described in JP-B-48-41708.
  • Vinyl urethane containing two or more polymerizable vinyl groups in one molecule obtained by adding a vinyl monomer containing a hydroxyl group represented by the following general formula (A) to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups Compounds and the like.
  • CH 2 C (R) COOCH 2 CH (R ′) OH (A) [In General Formula (A), R and R ′ each independently represent H or CH 3 . ]
  • dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-320; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Company-made) dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. And a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are interposed via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues. These oligomer types can also be used.
  • the structure, details of usage such as single use or combination, addition amount and the like can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of the coloring composition.
  • a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable.
  • those having three or more functionalities are preferable, and those having different functional numbers and different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic acid ester, methacrylic acid ester, styrene compound, vinyl ether compound) are used in combination.
  • a method of adjusting both sensitivity and intensity is also effective.
  • compatibility may be improved by the use of a low-purity compound or a combination of two or more.
  • a specific structure may be selected from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a substrate.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 15 to 75% by mass, and more preferably 20 to 60% from the viewpoint of more effectively obtaining the effects of the present invention. Mass% is particularly preferred.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound or two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can polymerize a polymerizable compound, and is preferably selected from the viewpoints of characteristics, initiation efficiency, absorption wavelength, availability, cost, and the like.
  • the photopolymerization initiator examples include at least one active halogen compound selected from halomethyloxadiazole compounds and halomethyl-s-triazine compounds, 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, lophine dimers, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds And derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, oxime compounds, and the like.
  • Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator include those described in paragraphs [0070] to [0077] of JP-A No. 2004-295116. Among these, an oxime compound or a biimidazole compound is preferable from the viewpoint of rapid polymerization reaction.
  • the oxime compound (hereinafter also referred to as “oxime photopolymerization initiator”) is not particularly limited, and is described in, for example, JP-A No. 2000-80068, WO 02 / 100903A1, and JP-A No. 2001-233842. These oxime compounds are mentioned. As specific examples of the oxime compound, the description in paragraph 0053 of JP2013-182215A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the oxime compound is more preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2).
  • R and X each represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, Ar represents an aryl group, and n represents an integer of 1 to 5. .
  • R is preferably an acyl group from the viewpoint of high sensitivity, and specifically, an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a benzoyl group, and a toluyl group are preferable.
  • A is an unsubstituted alkylene group, an alkylene group substituted with an alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a tert-butyl group, or a dodecyl group) from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloration due to heating,
  • An alkylene group substituted with an alkenyl group for example, vinyl group, allyl group
  • aryl group for example, phenyl group, p-tolyl group, xylyl group, cumenyl group, naphthyl group, anthryl group, phenanthryl group, styryl group
  • a substituted alkylene group is preferred.
  • Ar is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloring due to heating.
  • the substituent is preferably a halogen group such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom.
  • X is an alkyl group that may have a substituent, an aryl group that may have a substituent, or an alkenyl that may have a substituent from the viewpoint of improving solvent solubility and absorption efficiency in the long wavelength region.
  • An arylthioxy group which may have an amino group and an amino group which may have a substituent are preferable.
  • n is preferably an integer of 1 to 2.
  • R 101 represents an alkyl group, an alkanoyl group, an alkenoyl group, an aryloyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a heteroaryloxycarbonyl group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, an arylthiocarbonyl.
  • Rf represents a carbocyclic aromatic group or a heterocyclic aromatic group.
  • R102 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, which may be substituted.
  • R 103 and R 104 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and these groups are further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyl group or the like. Also good.
  • R 105 to R 111 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloyl group, a heteroaryloyl group, an alkylthio group, an aryloylthio group, or a heteroaryloyl group.
  • One or two of R 105 to R 111 are electron-withdrawing substituents, that is, a nitro group, a cyano group, a halogen group, an alkylcarbonyl group or an arylcarbonyl group, which has a much higher curability. Since a coloring composition is obtained, it is preferable.
  • the compound having a fluorene structure represented by the general formula (2) can be synthesized according to the synthesis method described in, for example, International Publication WO 2014/05050738 Pamphlet.
  • biimidazole compound As specific examples of the biimidazole compound, the description in paragraphs 0061 to 0070 of JP2013-182213A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the colored composition is preferably 3% by mass to 20% by mass and more preferably 4% by mass to 19% by mass from the viewpoint of obtaining the effect of the present invention more effectively. 5 mass% to 18 mass% is particularly preferable.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it can satisfy the solubility of each coexisting component and the coating property when it is a colored composition, and in particular, the solubility, coating property, and safety of the binder. Is preferably selected in consideration of
  • organic solvent examples include esters, ethers, ketones, and aromatic hydrocarbons, and specific examples include those described in paragraph numbers 0161 to 0162 of JP2012-032754A.
  • organic solvents are preferably mixed in two or more types from the viewpoints of the solubility of each of the above-mentioned components and, when an alkali-soluble polymer is included, the solubility of the components and the improvement of the coated surface.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the colored composition is preferably such that the total solid concentration in the composition is 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and more preferably 15% by mass to 60% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic solvent or two or more types of organic solvents. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of this invention contains the alkali-soluble binder.
  • the alkali-soluble binder is not particularly limited except that it has alkali solubility, and can be preferably selected from the viewpoints of heat resistance, developability, availability, and the like.
  • the alkali-soluble binder is preferably a linear organic polymer, soluble in an organic solvent and developable with a weak alkaline aqueous solution.
  • linear organic high molecular polymers include polymers having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-. No. 25957, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, etc. Examples thereof include polymers, maleic acid copolymers, partially esterified maleic acid copolymers, and acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain are also useful.
  • the alkali-soluble binder in the present invention includes those obtained by adding an acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, poly (2-hydroxyethyl (meth)). Acrylate), polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene oxide, polyvinyl alcohol, and the like are also useful. Further, the linear organic high molecular polymer may be a copolymer of hydrophilic monomers.
  • Examples include alkoxyalkyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate, glycerol (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, N-methylol acrylamide, secondary or tertiary alkyl acrylamide, dialkylaminoalkyl (meth) Acrylate, morpholine (meth) acrylate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylcaprolactam, vinylimidazole, vinyltriazole, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, branched or linear propyl (meth) acrylate, branched or straight Examples include chain butyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyhydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, and the like.
  • hydrophilic monomers include tetrahydrofurfuryl group, phosphoric acid group, phosphoric ester group, quaternary ammonium base, ethyleneoxy chain, propyleneoxy chain, sulfonic acid group and groups derived from salts thereof, morpholinoethyl group, etc. Monomers comprising it are also useful.
  • alkali-soluble binder a copolymer of maleimide and ethylene oxide as shown in the following formulas (b1) and (b2) can also be preferably used.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an aryl group, or an alkyl group.
  • alkyl group when R 1 represents an alkyl group include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having a branched chain having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. More specifically, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the alkyl group include a phenyl group, a carbonyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, and an amino group.
  • R 1 represents an aryl group
  • examples of the aryl group include a monocyclic aryl group, a polycyclic aryl group, a condensed ring aryl group, a heteroaryl group containing a hetero atom, and the like. More specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a biphenyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a furyl group, and the like can be given.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the aryl group include an alkyl group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, and a cyclohexyl group, an alkoxy group such as a methoxy group, Examples thereof include a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a nitro group, a chloro group, and a bromo group.
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 3 represents an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an aryl group, or an alkyl group
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 15.
  • Examples of the alkyl group when R 4 represents an alkyl group include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having a branched chain having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. More specifically, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, and the like can be given.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the alkyl group include a phenyl group, a carbonyl group, and an alkoxy group.
  • Examples of the aryl group when R 4 represents an aryl group include a monocyclic aryl group, a polycyclic aryl group, a condensed ring aryl group, and a heteroaryl group containing a heteroatom. More specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthranyl group, a biphenyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, an indolyl group, an imidazolyl group, an oxazolyl group, a carbazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a furyl group, and the like can be given.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the aryl group include a nonyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group and other alkyl groups, and a methoxy group. Examples thereof include an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a nitro group, a chloro group, and a bromo group.
  • the alkali-soluble binder may have a polymerizable group in the side chain in order to improve the crosslinking efficiency, and includes, for example, an allyl group, a (meth) acryl group, an allyloxyalkyl group, etc. in the side chain.
  • Polymers and the like are also useful.
  • examples of the above-mentioned polymer containing a polymerizable group include commercially available KS resist-106 (manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), cyclomer P series (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and the like.
  • alcohol-soluble nylon, polyether of 2,2-bis- (4-hydroxyphenyl) -propane and epichlorohydrin, etc. are also useful.
  • polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable, and from the viewpoint of development control.
  • acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable, and from the viewpoint of development control.
  • a copolymer having a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (2) and an acidic group is preferred, and more preferably a structural unit represented by the general formula (3) in addition to the general formula (2) and the acidic group.
  • R 20 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 21 to R 25 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 12 and R 13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an unsaturated double bond having 3 to 20 carbon atoms as a partial structure.
  • R 12 and R 13 are not both hydrogen atoms, and at least one of R 12 and R 13 is a carbonyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms containing an unsaturated double bond as a partial structure. When represented, it may further contain a carboxy group as a partial structure.
  • acrylic resins include copolymers composed of monomers selected from benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, and the like, and commercially available KS resist 106 (Osaka).
  • benzyl (meth) acrylate (meth) acrylic acid, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, and the like
  • commercially available KS resist 106 Osaka.
  • Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P Series (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and the like are preferable.
  • the alkali-soluble binder may contain a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer represented by the following formula (X).
  • Formula (X) (In Formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring which may contain a benzene ring. And represents an alkyl group of 20. n represents an integer of 1 to 15.)
  • the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring.
  • Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
  • the alkali-soluble binder is preferably a polymer having a weight average molecular weight (polystyrene equivalent value measured by GPC method) of 1,000 to 200,000 from the viewpoint of developability, liquid viscosity, etc., and 2,000 to 100,000. More preferred is a polymer of 5,000 to 50,000.
  • the blending amount of the alkali-soluble binder is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 20 to 60% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the acid value of the alkali-soluble binder is preferably 10 to 1000 mg / KOH, more preferably 50 to 300 mg / KOH, still more preferably 50 to 200 mg / KOH, and particularly preferably 105 to 200 mg / KOH.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of alkali-soluble binder or two or more kinds. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may further contain a crosslinking agent.
  • the crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction.
  • at least selected from (a) an epoxy resin, (b) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group. Substituted with at least one substituent selected from a melamine compound, a guanamine compound, a glycoluril compound or a urea compound, (c) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group, which is substituted with one substituent; Phenol compounds, naphthol compounds or hydroxyanthracene compounds. Of these, polyfunctional epoxy resins are preferred.
  • specific examples of the crosslinking agent reference can be made to the description in paragraphs 0134 to 0147 of JP-A No. 2004-295116, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant.
  • the surfactant may be nonionic, cationic, or anionic, but a surfactant having an ethylene oxide structure and a fluorosurfactant are preferred.
  • a surfactant having an ethylene oxide structure having an HLB value in the range of 9.2 to 15.5 or a fluorosurfactant described in JP-A-2-54202 is preferred.
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 2.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition, and more preferably. Is 0.005% by mass to 1.0% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may further contain various additives such as a filler, an antioxidant, an ultraviolet absorber, an anti-aggregation agent, a sensitizer and a light stabilizer as necessary.
  • a dye stabilizer is preferably added to the composition of the present invention.
  • the stabilizer for example, cationic, anionic, nonionic, amphoteric, silicone, and fluorine surfactants can be used.
  • the surfactants a polymer surfactant (polymer dispersant) is preferable because it can be uniformly and finely dispersed.
  • polymer dispersant examples include (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as polyacrylic acid esters; (partial) amine salts of (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid such as polyacrylic acid; (Partial) ammonium salt and (partial) alkylamine salt; (co) polymer of hydroxyl group-containing unsaturated carboxylic acid ester such as hydroxyl group-containing polyacrylic acid ester or knitted product thereof; sulfonic acid or phosphoric acid having a crosslinkable group And the like.
  • the crosslinkable group a crosslinkable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, an acid, or heat can be used.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant.
  • the antioxidant include a radical scavenger, a peroxide decomposer, an ultraviolet absorber, and a singlet oxygen quencher.
  • the radical scavenger include phenolic antioxidants and hindered amine antioxidants.
  • phenolic antioxidants include hydroxyphenylpropionate compounds, hydroxybenzyl compounds, thiobisphenol compounds, thiomethylphenol compounds, alkanediylphenol compounds, and the like. Of these, hydroxyphenylpropionate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
  • a peroxide decomposer is a compound that decomposes peroxides generated by exposure to light into harmless substances and prevents the generation of new radicals.
  • phosphorus antioxidants for example, phosphorus antioxidants, sulfur And system antioxidants.
  • sulfur-based antioxidants are preferable from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
  • the ultraviolet absorber include salicylate-based antioxidants and benzophenone-based antioxidants.
  • a singlet oxygen quencher is a compound capable of deactivating singlet oxygen by energy transfer from oxygen in a singlet state.
  • Amines such as diazabicyclooctane (DABCO) and N-ethylimidazole, condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds such as optionally substituted naphthalene, dimethylnaphthalene, dimethoxyanthracene, anthracene and diphenylanthracene; 1,3-diphenylisobenzofuran
  • DABCO diazabicyclooctane
  • N-ethylimidazole condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds such as optionally substituted naphthalene, dimethylnaphthalene, dimethoxyanthracene, anthracene and diphenylanthracene
  • 1,3-diphenylisobenzofuran In addition to aromatic compounds such as 1,2,3,4-tetraphenyl-1,3-cyclopentadiene and pentaphenylcyclopentadiene, Harry H. et al. wasserman, “Single Oxygen
  • Turro ““ Modern Molecular Photochemistry ””, Chapter 14, The Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. , Inc. (1978), and CMC Co., Ltd., High Performance Chemicals for Color Photosensitive Materials, Chapter 7 (2002) can include compounds exemplified as singlet oxygen quenchers.
  • a metal complex having a sulfur atom-containing compound as a ligand can be exemplified.
  • such compounds include transition metal chelate compounds such as nickel complexes, cobalt complexes, copper complexes, manganese complexes, and platinum complexes having bisdithio- ⁇ -diketone, bisphenyldithiol, and thiobisphenol as ligands.
  • the sulfur antioxidant include thiopropionate compounds and mercaptobenzimidazole compounds. Of these, thiopropionate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
  • the antioxidants can be used alone or in admixture of two or more.
  • the content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, particularly preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the colorant.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a compound that functions as a curing agent.
  • a compound that functions as a curing agent For example, at least one compound selected from the group consisting of aromatic amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, amine salts, phosphonium salts, amidine salts, amide compounds, thiol compounds, blocked isocyanate compounds, and imidazole ring-containing compounds can be used.
  • the coloring composition contains such a curing agent, the low-temperature curing of the coloring pattern can be more effectively realized.
  • the storage stability of the colored composition can be further improved.
  • a compound that is more easily reduced than the above dye can be added as an anti-reduction agent for the dye.
  • dye reduction fading can be further suppressed during ITO sputtering after pixel formation.
  • a quinone compound is preferable, and a quinone compound having a molecular weight of about 100 to 800 and having the following structure is preferable.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may further contain various additives such as a filler, an ultraviolet absorber, an aggregation inhibitor, a sensitizer and a light stabilizer, as necessary.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the above-described components and optional components as necessary.
  • the components constituting the colored composition may be mixed together, or may be sequentially added after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent.
  • the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
  • the colored composition prepared as described above is preferably used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.01 ⁇ m to 3.0 ⁇ m, more preferably a pore size of about 0.05 ⁇ m to 0.5 ⁇ m. Can be provided.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can form a colored cured film excellent in hue and contrast, it can be used in liquid crystal display devices (LCD) and color filters used in solid-state imaging devices (for example, CCD, CMOS, etc.). It can be suitably used for forming colored pixels and for producing printing ink, inkjet ink, paint, and the like. In particular, it is suitable for use in forming colored pixels for liquid crystal display devices.
  • LCD liquid crystal display devices
  • CMOS CMOS
  • it is suitable for use in forming colored pixels for liquid crystal display devices.
  • the color filter of the present invention is configured by providing a substrate and a colored region containing the colored composition of the present invention on the substrate.
  • the colored region on the substrate is composed of colored films such as red (R), green (G), and blue (B) that form each pixel of the color filter.
  • the color filter of the present invention may be formed by any method as long as it can form a colored region (colored pattern) cured by applying the colored composition of the present invention on a substrate. Preferably, it is produced using the coloring composition of the present invention.
  • the production method described in paragraphs 0359 to 0371 of JP2011-252065A can also be employed. .
  • the method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes a step (A) of applying (preferably coating) the above-described colored composition on a substrate to form a colored layer (also referred to as a colored composition layer), and a step It has the process (B) which hardens the coloring composition layer formed in (A).
  • the curing step is preferably performed in a pattern (preferably through a mask), and the uncured portion of the coating film is developed and removed with a developer to form a colored region (colored pattern). By passing through these steps, a colored pattern composed of pixels of each color (3 colors or 4 colors) is formed, and a color filter can be obtained.
  • the step (C) of irradiating the colored pattern formed in the step (B) with ultraviolet rays and the colored pattern irradiated with the ultraviolet rays in the step (C) are applied.
  • the aspect which further provided the process (D) which heat-processes is preferable.
  • the substrate for example, alkali-free glass, sodium glass, Pyrex (registered trademark) glass, quartz glass used for liquid crystal display elements and the like, and those obtained by attaching a transparent conductive film thereto, solid-state imaging elements, and the like are used.
  • the photoelectric conversion element substrate include a silicone substrate and a plastic substrate. Further, on these substrates, a black matrix for isolating each pixel may be formed, or a transparent resin layer may be provided for promoting adhesion. Further, if necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on the substrate in order to improve adhesion to the upper layer, prevent diffusion of substances, or flatten the surface.
  • the plastic substrate preferably has a gas barrier layer and / or a solvent resistant layer on its surface.
  • a driving substrate on which a thin film transistor (TFT) of a thin film transistor (TFT) type color liquid crystal display device is disposed (hereinafter referred to as “TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate”) is used as the substrate.
  • TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate a driving substrate on which a thin film transistor (TFT) of a thin film transistor (TFT) type color liquid crystal display device is disposed.
  • a color filter using the colored composition of the present invention can also be formed on the top to produce a color filter.
  • the substrate in the TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate include glass, silicone, polycarbonate, polyester, aromatic polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide. These substrates may be subjected to appropriate pretreatment such as chemical treatment with a silane coupling agent or the like, plasma treatment, ion plating, sputtering, gas phase reaction method, vacuum deposition, etc., if desired.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is applied to the substrate directly or via another layer.
  • coating is preferable, and coating is preferably performed by a coating method such as spin coating, slit coating, cast coating, roll coating, bar coating, and inkjet.
  • the method for applying the colored composition of the present invention to the substrate is not particularly limited, but a method using a slit nozzle such as a slit-and-spin method or a spinless coating method (hereinafter referred to as slit nozzle).
  • the application method is preferred.
  • the slit-and-spin coating method and the spinless coating method have different conditions depending on the size of the coated substrate. For example, a fifth generation glass substrate (1100 mm ⁇ 1250 mm) is coated by the spinless coating method.
  • the discharge amount of the coloring composition from the slit nozzle is usually 500 microliters / second to 2000 microliters / second, preferably 800 microliters / second to 1500 microliters / second, and the coating speed is Usually, it is 50 mm / second to 300 mm / second, preferably 100 mm / second to 200 mm / second.
  • the solid content of the coloring composition used in the coating step is usually 10% to 20%, preferably 13% to 18%.
  • the thickness of the coating film is generally 0.3 ⁇ m to 5.0 ⁇ m, preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 4.0 ⁇ m. Most preferably, the thickness is 0.5 ⁇ m to 3.0 ⁇ m. In the case of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, the thickness of the coating film (after pre-baking) is preferably in the range of 0.5 ⁇ m to 5.0 ⁇ m.
  • a pre-bake treatment is performed after application.
  • vacuum treatment can be performed before pre-baking.
  • the vacuum drying conditions are such that the degree of vacuum is usually about 0.1 to 1.0 torr, preferably about 0.2 to 0.5 torr.
  • the pre-bake treatment is performed in a temperature range of 50 ° C. to 140 ° C., preferably about 70 ° C. to 110 ° C., using a hot plate, an oven, etc., and can be performed under conditions of 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
  • high-frequency treatment or the like may be used in combination with the pre-bake treatment.
  • the high frequency treatment can be used alone.
  • Examples of the pre-baking condition include a condition of heating at 70 to 130 ° C. for about 0.5 to 15 minutes using a hot plate or an oven.
  • the thickness of the colored composition layer formed of the colored composition is appropriately selected according to the purpose.
  • the range of 0.2 ⁇ m to 5.0 ⁇ m is preferable, the range of 1.0 ⁇ m to 4.0 ⁇ m is more preferable, and the range of 1.5 ⁇ m to 3.5 ⁇ m is most preferable.
  • the range of 0.2 ⁇ m to 5.0 ⁇ m is preferable, the range of 0.3 ⁇ m to 2.5 ⁇ m is more preferable, and the range of 0.3 ⁇ m to 1.5 ⁇ m is most preferable.
  • the thickness of a coloring composition layer is a film thickness after prebaking.
  • the film (colored composition layer) made of the colored composition formed on the substrate as described above is exposed through, for example, a photomask.
  • a photomask As light or radiation applicable to exposure, g-line, h-line, i-line, j-line, KrF light and ArF light are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
  • i-line is particularly preferable.
  • the i-line to the irradiation light is preferably irradiated at an exposure dose of 100mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 10000mJ / cm 2.
  • exposure rays include ultra high pressure, high pressure, medium pressure, low pressure mercury lamps, chemical lamps, carbon arc lamps, xenon lamps, metal halide lamps, various visible and ultraviolet laser light sources, fluorescent lamps, tungsten lamps, solar Light or the like can also be used.
  • an ultraviolet laser is used as the light source.
  • the irradiation light is preferably an ultraviolet laser having a wavelength in the range of 300 nm to 380 nm, more preferably an ultraviolet laser having a wavelength in the range of 300 nm to 360 nm matches the photosensitive wavelength of the resist. Is preferable.
  • the Nd: YAG laser third harmonic (355 nm), which is a relatively inexpensive solid output, and the excimer laser XeCl (308 nm), XeF (353 nm) can be suitably used. .
  • the exposure amount of the object to be exposed is in the range of 1 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably in the range of 1 mJ / cm 2 to 50 mJ / cm 2 . An exposure amount within this range is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern formation productivity.
  • a color filter for a liquid crystal display device exposure using mainly h-line and i-line is preferably used by a proximity exposure machine and a mirror projection exposure machine. Further, when manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, it is preferable to mainly use i-line in a stepper exposure machine.
  • the photomask used has a through hole or a U-shaped depression in addition to a pattern for forming a pixel (colored pattern). The thing in which the pattern for forming is provided is used.
  • the colored composition layer exposed as described above can be heated.
  • the exposure can be performed while flowing a nitrogen gas in the chamber in order to suppress oxidation fading of the coloring material in the colored composition layer.
  • a negative type or positive type coloring pattern (resist pattern) can be formed.
  • the uncured portion of the coating film after exposure is eluted in the developer, and only the cured portion remains on the substrate.
  • Any developer can be used as long as it dissolves the coating film (colored composition layer) of the colored composition in the uncured part, but does not dissolve the cured part.
  • combinations of various organic solvents and alkaline aqueous solutions can be used. Examples of the organic solvent used for development include the above-described solvents that can be used when preparing the colored composition of the present invention.
  • alkaline aqueous solution examples include tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate Sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0 ]
  • concentration of an alkaline compound such as -7-undecene is 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
  • alkali aqueous solution was dissolved at a.
  • the alkali concentration is preferably adjusted to pH 11 to 13, more preferably pH 11.5 to 12.5.
  • An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol or ethanol, a surfactant, or the like can be added to the alkaline aqueous solution.
  • the development temperature is usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., and the development time is 20 seconds to 90 seconds.
  • Development may be any of a dip method, a shower method, a spray method, and the like, and may be combined with a swing method, a spin method, an ultrasonic method, or the like. It is also possible to prevent development unevenness by previously moistening the surface to be developed with water or the like before touching the developer. It is also possible to develop with the substrate tilted. Further, when manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, paddle development is also used.
  • a rinsing process for washing and removing excess developer is performed, followed by drying, followed by heat treatment (post-baking) to complete the curing.
  • the rinse treatment is usually performed with pure water, but to save liquid, pure water is used in the final cleaning, and used pure water is used in the initial stage of cleaning, or the substrate is inclined and cleaned. You may use the method of using ultrasonic irradiation together.
  • a heat treatment at about 200 ° C. to 250 ° C. is usually performed.
  • the coating film after development is continuously or batch-treated using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer) or a high-frequency heater so as to satisfy the above conditions. It can be done with an expression.
  • the color filter of the present invention has high contrast, small color density unevenness, and good color characteristics, it can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device or a liquid crystal display device.
  • -Process (D)- It is preferable to further heat-treat the colored pattern that has been post-exposed by ultraviolet irradiation as described above.
  • the color pattern By heating the formed color pattern (so-called post-bake process), the color pattern can be further cured.
  • This heat treatment can be performed by, for example, a hot plate, various heaters, an oven, or the like.
  • the temperature during the heat treatment is preferably 100 ° C. to 300 ° C., more preferably 150 ° C. to 250 ° C.
  • the heating time is preferably about 10 minutes to 120 minutes.
  • the colored pattern thus obtained constitutes a pixel in the color filter.
  • the above steps (A), (B), and if necessary, the steps (C) and (D) are repeated according to the desired number of colors. Good. It should be noted that the above step (C) and / or step (D) may be performed each time the formation, exposure, and development of the monochromatic coloring composition layer is completed (for each color) After all the colored composition layers have been formed, exposed, and developed, the step (C) and / or the step (D) may be performed collectively.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can also be applied to a color filter manufacturing method including a dry etching step.
  • a color filter manufacturing method including a dry etching step.
  • the step of forming a colored layer using the colored composition of the present invention the step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer, the photoresist layer by exposing and developing.
  • the manufacturing method include a step of patterning to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may be a photocurable composition or a thermosetting composition.
  • a thermosetting agent can be used.
  • the thermosetting agent a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule is preferable.
  • the color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter of the present invention (the color filter of the present invention) is excellent in hue and contrast because the colored composition of the present invention is used.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used for a liquid crystal display element or a solid-state image sensor, and is particularly suitable for use in a liquid crystal display device. When used in a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to display an image with excellent spectral characteristics and contrast while achieving a good hue using a triarylmethane dye as a colorant.
  • the description has mainly focused on the use for forming the color pattern of the color filter in the above, but it is also applicable to the formation of a black matrix for isolating the color pattern (pixel) constituting the color filter. can do.
  • a coloring composition containing a black pigment processed pigment such as carbon black or titanium black is used, followed by coating, exposure, and development, and then post-baking as necessary. Can be formed.
  • the liquid crystal display element and the solid-state image sensor of the present invention are provided with the color filter of the present invention. More specifically, for example, by forming an alignment film on the inner surface side of the color filter, facing the electrode substrate, and filling the gap with liquid crystal and sealing, a panel which is the liquid crystal display element of the present invention is obtained. .
  • the solid-state image sensor of this invention is obtained by forming a color filter on a light receiving element.
  • liquid crystal display devices For the definition of liquid crystal display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho) Issued in 1989).
  • the liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
  • the color filter of the present invention is particularly effective for a color TFT liquid crystal display device.
  • the color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”.
  • the present invention is applied to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS and a pixel division method such as MVA, STN, TN, VA, OCS, FFS, and R-OCB. it can.
  • the color filter of the present invention can also be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system.
  • COA Color-filter On Array
  • the color filter of the present invention When the color filter of the present invention is used for a liquid crystal display element, a high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength tube of a cold cathode tube, and further, red, green and blue LED light sources (RGB-LED).
  • RGB-LED red, green and blue LED light sources
  • the colored composition of the present invention can be preferably used for a solid-state imaging device.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device is a configuration provided with a color filter manufactured using the colored composition of the present invention, and is not particularly limited as long as the configuration functions as a solid-state imaging device. Such a structure is mentioned.
  • a transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are disposed on the support
  • Triarylmethane dye (I-1) Compound having the following structure
  • Photopolymerizable compound (T-1) Kayalad DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., a mixture of dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate and dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate)
  • Solvent (X-1) Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • Example 2 to 27 A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the triarylmethane dye (I-1) was changed to the following (I-2) to (I-21) and (I-101) to (I-106). Prepared.
  • Example 28 A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the alkali-soluble binder (U-1) used in Example 1 was changed to the following alkali-soluble binder (U-1-1).
  • Alkali-soluble binder (U-1-1) benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / allyl methacrylate (20/60/20) [mass ratio] copolymer (weight average molecular weight: 20,000) in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solution ( Solid content 40.0% by mass) Acid value (250 mgKOH / g)
  • Example 29> A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the alkali-soluble binder (U-1) used in Example 1 was changed to the following alkali-soluble binder (U-2-1).
  • Example 30 A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the alkali-soluble binder (U-1) used in Example 1 was changed to the following alkali-soluble binder (U-1-2).
  • Comparative example 2 A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the triarylmethane dye was changed to the following Comparative Compound 2.
  • Comparative compound 2 (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., product name Basic Blue 7)
  • the colored composition was applied onto a glass substrate with an ITO electrode (trade name: 1737 manufactured by Corning) to a thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m after drying, and dried (prebaked) in an oven at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds. Thereafter, exposure was performed at 100 mJ / cm 2 without using a mask (illuminance was 20 mW / cm 2 ), and a 1% aqueous solution of an alkali developer (trade name: CDK-1, manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.) was used. It was developed at 25 ° C., washed with water and dried, and the coated film was heat-treated (post-baked) in an oven at 230 ° C.
  • ITO electrode trade name: 1737 manufactured by Corning
  • the present invention can provide a colored composition having excellent heat resistance, solvent resistance and voltage holding ratio.
  • the heat resistance, solvent resistance, and voltage holding ratio were not good in the colored composition of the comparative example.

Abstract

Provided are: a colored composition having excellent heat resistance, excellent solvent resistance and an excellent voltage retention rate; a cured film; a color filter; a method for producing a color filter; a solid state imaging element; and a liquid crystal display device. The colored composition according to the present invention comprises: a coloring agent which contains a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinking group and a cation and having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and a counter anion; and a polymerizable compound.

Description

着色組成物、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子および液晶表示装置Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and liquid crystal display device
 本発明は、着色組成物、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子および液晶表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a colored composition, a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and a liquid crystal display device.
 従来、カラーフィルタは、有機顔料や無機顔料を分散させた顔料分散組成物と、多官能モノマー、重合開始剤、アルカリ可溶性樹脂、および必要に応じその他の成分とを含有することにより着色組成物とし、これを用いてフォトリソグラフィ法、インクジェット法などによって着色パターンを形成することで製造されている。
 近年、カラーフィルタは、液晶表示素子(LCD)用途においてモニターのみならずテレビ(TV)へと用途が拡大する傾向にある。この用途拡大の傾向に伴い、カラーフィルタには、色度、コントラストなどにおいて高度の色特性が要求されるに至っている。また、イメージセンサ(固体撮像素子)用途のカラーフィルタにおいても、同様に色ムラの低減、色分解能の向上など色特性の更なる向上が求められるようになっている。
 ところが、従来の顔料分散系では、顔料の粗大粒子による散乱の発生、分散安定性不良による粘度上昇等の問題が起きやすく、コントラスト、輝度をさらに向上させることは困難であることが多い。
 そこで、従来から着色剤としては、顔料だけでなく、染料を用いることが検討されている(例えば、特許文献1参照)。着色剤として染料を使用すると、染料自体の色純度やその色相の鮮やかさにより、画像表示させたときの表示画像の色相や輝度を高めることができ、かつ粗大粒子がなくなるためコントラストを向上させられる点で有用とされている。
 染料の例としては、フタロシアニン染料、ジピロメテン染料、ピリミジンアゾ染料、ピラゾールアゾ染料、キサンテン染料、トリアリールメタン染料など、多種多様な色素母体を持つ化合物が知られている(例えば、特許文献2~8を参照)。
Conventionally, a color filter is made into a colored composition by containing a pigment dispersion composition in which an organic pigment or an inorganic pigment is dispersed, a polyfunctional monomer, a polymerization initiator, an alkali-soluble resin, and other components as necessary. This is used to form a colored pattern by a photolithography method, an ink jet method or the like.
In recent years, color filters tend to be used not only for monitors but also for televisions (TVs) in liquid crystal display (LCD) applications. Along with this trend of expanding applications, color filters are required to have high color characteristics in terms of chromaticity and contrast. Similarly, color filters for image sensors (solid-state imaging devices) are required to further improve color characteristics such as reduction of color unevenness and improvement of color resolution.
However, in the conventional pigment dispersion system, problems such as the occurrence of scattering due to coarse particles of the pigment and the increase in viscosity due to poor dispersion stability are likely to occur, and it is often difficult to further improve the contrast and brightness.
Therefore, conventionally, as a colorant, it has been studied to use not only a pigment but also a dye (for example, see Patent Document 1). When a dye is used as a colorant, the hue and brightness of a display image when an image is displayed can be increased due to the color purity of the dye itself and the vividness of the hue, and contrast can be improved because coarse particles are eliminated. It is useful in terms.
As examples of dyes, compounds having a wide variety of chromophores such as phthalocyanine dyes, dipyrromethene dyes, pyrimidine azo dyes, pyrazole azo dyes, xanthene dyes, triarylmethane dyes are known (for example, Patent Documents 2 to 8). See).
特開平6-75375号公報JP-A-6-75375 特開2008-292970号公報JP 2008-292970 A 特開2007-039478号公報JP 2007-039478 A 特開平9-157536号公報JP-A-9-157536 特開2013-25194号公報JP 2013-25194 A 特開2012-201694号公報JP 2012-201694 A 特開2012-108469号公報JP 2012-108469 A 特開2000-095805号公報JP 2000-095805 A
 ここで、カラーフィルタ等に用いる着色組成物としては、耐熱性、耐溶剤性および電圧保持率がより優れたものが求められている。
 本発明は、かかる課題を解決することを目的としたものであって、耐熱性、耐溶剤性および電圧保持率に優れた着色組成物を提供することを目的とする。特に、ブルーフィルタ用の着色組成物として有益なものを提供することを課題とする。
Here, as a coloring composition used for a color filter or the like, a composition having more excellent heat resistance, solvent resistance, and voltage holding ratio is required.
The object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition that is excellent in heat resistance, solvent resistance, and voltage holding ratio. In particular, an object is to provide a useful coloring composition for a blue filter.
 かかる状況のもと、本願発明者が鋭意検討を行った結果、架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造と対アニオンを含む着色剤を組成物中に配合することで、上記課題を解決しうることを見出した。
 具体的には、下記手段<1>により、好ましくは、<2>~<14>により、上記課題は解決された。
<1>架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造と対アニオンを含む着色剤と、重合性化合物を含む、着色組成物。
<2>架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造が、一般式(TP1)および/または一般式(TP2)で表される、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。Rtp5、Rtp6、Rtp8、Rtp9及びRtp11は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表す。Rtp7は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基又はNRtp71Rtp72を表す。Rtp71及びRtp72は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。Rtp10は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。a、b及びcは、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表す。a、b及びcが2以上の場合、Rtp6、Rtp7及びRtp8のうち2つは、互いに、連結して環を形成してもよい。Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかに架橋性基を有する。)
<3>対アニオンが、フッ素アニオン、塩素アニオン、臭素アニオン、ヨウ素アニオン、シアン化物イオン、過塩素酸アニオン、ボレートアニオン、PF6-およびSbF6-から選択される少なくとも1種、ならびに、
-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、下記一般式(A1)で表される構造および下記一般式(A2)で表される構造から選択される少なくとも1種から選択される、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物。
一般式(A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
(一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-または-CO-を表す。)
一般式(A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
(一般式(A2)中、R3は、-SO2-または-CO-を表す。R4およびR5はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-、-CO-または-CNを表す。)
<4>対アニオンが架橋性基を含む化合物中に含まれる、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<5>対アニオンが繰り返し単位中に含まれる、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<6>架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造が、一般式(TP1A)または一般式(TP2A)で表される、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
(一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。Rtp5、Rtp6、Rtp8、Rtp9及びRtp11は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表す。Rtp7は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基又はNRtp71Rtp72を表す。Rtp71及びRtp72は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。Rtp10は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。a、b及びcは、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表す。a、b及びcが2以上の場合、Rtp6、Rtp7及びRtp8のうち2つは、互いに、連結して環を形成してもよい。Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかに架橋性基を有する。Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P)で置換されていてもよい。)
一般式(P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(一般式(P)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、X1は-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、下記一般式(A1)で表される構造を含む基および下記一般式(A2)で表される構造を含む基から選択される少なくとも1種から選択される。
一般式(A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
(一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-または-CO-を表す。)
一般式(A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
(一般式(A2)中、R3は、-SO2-または-CO-を表す。R4およびR5はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-、-CO-または-CNを表す。)
<7>光重合開始剤をさらに含む、<1>~<6>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<8>カラーフィルタの着色層形成用である、<1>~<7>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<9><1>~<8>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を硬化してなる着色硬化膜。
<10><9>に記載の着色硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ。
<11><1>~<8>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を支持体上に付与して着色組成物層を形成する工程と、上記着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程とを含むカラーフィルタの製造方法。
<12><1>~<8>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を支持体上に付与して着色組成物層を形成し、硬化して着色層を形成する工程、着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、露光および現像することによりフォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、もしくはレジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして着色層をドライエッチングする工程を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
<13><11>または<12>に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法によって製造したカラーフィルタ。
<14><10>に記載のカラーフィルタまたは<11>または<12>に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により作製されたカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子または画像表示装置。
Under such circumstances, the inventor of the present application diligently studied, and as a result, by blending a colorant containing a triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation and a counter anion into the composition, I found that the problem could be solved.
Specifically, the above-mentioned problem has been solved by the following means <1>, preferably <2> to <14>.
<1> A colored composition comprising a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and a counter anion and a polymerizable compound.
<2> The colored composition according to <1>, wherein the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation is represented by the general formula (TP1) and / or the general formula (TP2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(In the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72. Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4. When a, b and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp Two of 7 and Rtp 8 may be linked to each other to form a ring, and any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a crosslinkable group.)
<3> At least one selected from the group consisting of a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, a borate anion, PF 6− and SbF 6− , and
-SO 3 -, -COO -, -PO 4 -, is selected from at least one selected from structures represented by the structure and the following general formula represented by the following general formula (A1) (A2), < The coloring composition as described in 1> or <2>.
General formula (A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
(In the general formula (A1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.)
General formula (A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
(In the general formula (A2), R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—. R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.)
<4> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the counter anion is contained in a compound containing a crosslinkable group.
<5> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein a counter anion is contained in the repeating unit.
<6> The colored composition according to <1>, wherein the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation is represented by the general formula (TP1A) or the general formula (TP2A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
(In the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72. Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4. When a, b and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and two of Rtp 8 is, .Rtp 1 ~ Rtp 11 with each other linked to the crosslinkable group in any of which may form a ring .Rtp 1 ~ Rtp 11, Rtp 71 and Rtp 72, Rt at least one p 71 and Rtp 72, but the general formula (P) may be substituted.)
General formula (P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(In the general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and X 1 represents —SO 3 , —COO , —PO 4 , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1). It is selected from at least one selected from a group containing and a group containing a structure represented by the following general formula (A2).
General formula (A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
(In the general formula (A1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.)
General formula (A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
(In the general formula (A2), R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—. R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.)
<7> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, further including a photopolymerization initiator.
<8> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, which is used for forming a colored layer of a color filter.
<9> A colored cured film obtained by curing the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <8>.
<10> A color filter having the colored cured film according to <9>.
<11> A step of applying the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <8> onto a support to form a colored composition layer, and a step of exposing the colored composition layer to a pattern. And a step of developing and removing the unexposed portion to form a colored pattern.
<12> A step of applying a colored composition according to any one of <1> to <8> onto a support to form a colored composition layer and curing to form a colored layer; A method for producing a color filter, comprising a step of forming a resist layer, a step of patterning a photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, or a step of dry etching a colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
<13> A color filter manufactured by the method for manufacturing a color filter according to <11> or <12>.
<14> A solid-state imaging device or an image display device having the color filter according to <10> or the color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to <11> or <12>.
 本発明によれば、耐熱性、耐溶剤性および電圧保持率に優れた着色組成物を提供することが可能となった。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a coloring composition having excellent heat resistance, solvent resistance and voltage holding ratio.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。尚、本明細書において「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、着色組成物の全組成から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記に於いて、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 また、本明細書中における「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等を意味する。また、本発明において光とは、活性光線または放射線を意味する。本明細書中における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、X線、EUV光などによる露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も露光に含める。
 また、本明細書において、“(メタ)アクリレート”はアクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、“(メタ)アクリル”はアクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、“(メタ)アクリロイル”はアクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 また、本明細書において、“単量体”と“モノマー”とは同義である。本明細書における単量体は、オリゴマーおよびポリマーと区別され、重量平均分子量が2,000以下の化合物をいう。本明細書において、重合性化合物とは、重合性官能基を有する化合物のことをいい、単量体であっても、ポリマーであってもよい。重合性官能基とは、重合反応に関与する基を言う。
 本明細書において、化学式中のMeはメチル基を、Etはエチル基を、Prはプロピル基を、Buはブチル基を、Phはフェニル基をそれぞれ示す。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本発明における重量平均分子量は、特に述べない限り、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)で測定したものをいう。GPCは、得られたポリマーについて、溶媒を除去することによって単離し、得られた固形分をテトラヒドロフランにて0.1質量%に希釈して、HLC-8020GPC(東ソー(株)製)にて、TSKgel Super Multipore HZ-H(東ソー(株)製、4.6mmID×15cm)を3本直列につないだものをカラムとして測定することができる。条件は、試料濃度を0.35質量%、流速を0.35mL/min、サンプル注入量を10μL、測定温度を40℃とし、RI検出器を用いて行うことができる。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail. In this specification, “to” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In this specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored composition.
In the description of the group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In addition, “radiation” in the present specification means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like. In the present invention, light means actinic rays or radiation. Unless otherwise specified, “exposure” in this specification is not only exposure with far-ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, but also drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Are also included in the exposure.
In this specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate, “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acryl and “(meth) acrylic” ) "Acryloyl" represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In the present specification, “monomer” and “monomer” are synonymous. The monomer in this specification is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less. In the present specification, the polymerizable compound means a compound having a polymerizable functional group, and may be a monomer or a polymer. The polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
In the present specification, Me in the chemical formula represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Pr represents a propyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In this specification, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
The weight average molecular weight in the present invention refers to that measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified. GPC was isolated by removing the solvent from the obtained polymer, and the obtained solid content was diluted to 0.1% by mass with tetrahydrofuran, and HLC-8020 GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) was used. The column can be measured by connecting three TSKgel Super Multipore HZ-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 4.6 mm ID × 15 cm) in series. The conditions can be performed using a RI detector with a sample concentration of 0.35% by mass, a flow rate of 0.35 mL / min, a sample injection amount of 10 μL, and a measurement temperature of 40 ° C.
<着色組成物>
 本発明の着色組成物は、架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造と対アニオンを含む着色剤と、重合性化合物を含む、ことを特徴とする。
 このような構成とすることにより、耐熱性、耐溶剤性および電圧保持率に優れた着色組成物を提供することができる。
 以下、着色剤について、第1の実施の形態および第2の実施の形態の順に説明する。
 第1の実施の形態は、以下で説明する第2の実施の形態以外の場合である。例えば、架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造と対アニオンとの結合部分に共有結合を有しない場合が挙げられる。
 第2の実施の形態は、対アニオンが、架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造のトリアリールメタン骨格部分と直接に共有結合している、または、対アニオンが、トリアリールメタン骨格部分と連結基を介して共有結合している場合が挙げられる。
<Coloring composition>
The colored composition of the present invention is characterized by containing a colorant containing a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and a counter anion, and a polymerizable compound.
By setting it as such a structure, the coloring composition excellent in heat resistance, solvent resistance, and voltage holding ratio can be provided.
Hereinafter, the colorant will be described in the order of the first embodiment and the second embodiment.
The first embodiment is a case other than the second embodiment described below. For example, there may be mentioned a case where the bonding part between the counter aryl group and the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation does not have a covalent bond.
In the second embodiment, the counter anion is directly covalently bonded to a triarylmethane skeleton portion of a triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation, or the counter anion is a triaryl. The case where it is covalently bonded to the methane skeleton portion via a linking group is mentioned.
着色剤の第1の実施の形態
 以下、架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造、対アニオンの順序で説明する。
<<トリアリールメタン構造>>
 トリアリールメタン構造が有する架橋性基としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な架橋性基を用いることができる。具体的には、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基、(メタ)アクリル基、スチレン基、ビニル基、アリル基、環状エーテル基等が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリル基、スチレン基、ビニル基およびアリル基から選択される少なくとも1種が好ましく、(メタ)アクリル基、スチレン基およびビニル基から選択される少なくとも1種がより好ましく、(メタ)アクリル基およびスチレン基がさらに好ましい。
 環状エーテル基は、例えば、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基等が好ましく、エポキシ基がより好ましい。
First Embodiment of Colorant Hereinafter, a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and a counter anion will be described.
<< Triarylmethane Structure >>
As the crosslinkable group possessed by the triarylmethane structure, a crosslinkable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, an acid, or heat can be used. Specific examples include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, a (meth) acryl group, a styrene group, a vinyl group, an allyl group, and a cyclic ether group, and a (meth) acryl group, a styrene group, and a vinyl group. And at least one selected from allyl groups is preferred, at least one selected from (meth) acrylic groups, styrene groups and vinyl groups is more preferred, and (meth) acrylic groups and styrene groups are more preferred.
For example, the cyclic ether group is preferably an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group, and more preferably an epoxy group.
 架橋性基とカチオンを有するトリアリールメタン構造の分子量は、2000以下であり、300~1500が好ましく、300~900がより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation is 2000 or less, preferably 300 to 1500, and more preferably 300 to 900.
 架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造は、下記一般式(TP1)および/または一般式(TP2)で表されることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
(一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。Rtp5、Rtp6、Rtp8、Rtp9及びRtp11は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表す。Rtp7は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基又はNRtp71Rtp72を表す。Rtp71及びRtp72は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。Rtp10は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。a、b及びcは、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表す。a、b及びcが2以上の場合、Rtp6、Rtp7及びRtp8のうち2つは、互いに、連結して環を形成してもよい。Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかに架橋性基を有する。)
The triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation is preferably represented by the following general formula (TP1) and / or general formula (TP2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
(In the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72. Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4. When a, b and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp Two of 7 and Rtp 8 may be linked to each other to form a ring, and any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a crosslinkable group.)
 一般式(TP1)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子またはアルキル基が好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換が好ましい。アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6がさらに好ましい。アリール基が有していてもよい置換基としては、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。
In general formula (TP1), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. The alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
 一般式(TP1)中、Rtp7は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはNRtp71Rtp72を表し、水素原子またはNRtp71Rtp72が好ましく、NRtp71Rtp72がより好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状が好ましい。アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6がさらに好ましい。
 Rtp71およびRtp72は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子またはアルキル基が好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~8がより好ましく、1~6がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。アルキル基は、無置換が好ましい。アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6がさらに好ましい。アリール基が有していてもよい置換基は、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。
In General Formula (TP1), Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 , preferably a hydrogen atom or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 , and more preferably NRtp 71 Rtp 72 .
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms.
Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. The alkyl group is preferably unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
 一般式(TP1)中、Rtp5、Rtp6およびRtp8は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表す。置換基としては、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。特に、炭素数1~5の直鎖若しくは分岐のアルキル基、炭素数1~5のアルケニル基、炭素数6~15のアリール基、カルボキシル基またはスルホ基が好ましく、炭素数1~5の直鎖若しくは分岐のアルキル基、炭素数1~5のアルケニル基、フェニル基またはカルボキシル基がさらに好ましい。特に、Rtp5およびRtp6は、それぞれ独立して炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。また、Rtp8は、その2つのアルケニル基が互いに結合して、環を形成していることが好ましい。環は、ベンゼン環が好ましい。 In general formula (TP1), Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 and Rtp 8 each independently represent a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later. In particular, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms, a carboxyl group, or a sulfo group is preferable, and a linear chain having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable. Or a branched alkyl group, an alkenyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group or a carboxyl group is more preferable. In particular, Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 are preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Rtp 8 preferably has two alkenyl groups bonded to each other to form a ring. The ring is preferably a benzene ring.
 一般式(TP1)中、a、bおよびcは、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、特にaおよびbは、0または1を表すことが好ましく、0を表すことがより好ましい。cは、0~2を表すことが好ましく、0または1を表すことがより好ましい。 In the general formula (TP1), a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and a and b preferably represent 0 or 1, more preferably 0. c preferably represents 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1.
 一般式(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、一般式(TP1)中のRtp1~Rtp4と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In general formula (TP2), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and are synonymous with Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 in general formula (TP1), and the preferred ranges are also the same. It is.
 一般式(TP2)中、Rtp5およびRtp6は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表し、一般式(TP1)中のRtp5およびRtp6と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In general formula (TP2), Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 each independently represent a substituent, and are synonymous with Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 in general formula (TP1), and their preferred ranges are also the same.
 一般式(TP2)中、Rtp9およびRtp11は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表し、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基を用いることができる。
 Rtp9は、アルキル基、アルコキシ基およびハロゲン原子が好ましい。
 Rtp11は、アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~3のアルキル基がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましく、直鎖状がより好ましい。
In General Formula (TP2), Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 each independently represent a substituent, and the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later can be used.
Rtp 9 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom.
Rtp 11 is preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
 一般式(TP2)中、Rtp10は、置換基を表し、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基を用いることができる。特に、Rtp10は、炭素数6~12のアリール基がより好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。 In General Formula (TP2), Rtp 10 represents a substituent, and the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later can be used. In particular, Rtp 10 is more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group.
 一般式(TP2)中、a、bおよびcは、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、特にaおよびbは、0または1を表すことが好ましく、0を表すことがより好ましい。cは、0~2を表すことが好ましく、0を表すことがより好ましい。 In the general formula (TP2), a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and a and b preferably represent 0 or 1, more preferably 0. c preferably represents 0 to 2, more preferably 0.
 Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかに架橋性基を有し、特に、Rtp71またはRtp72に架橋性基を有することが好ましい。
 架橋性基を有する基は、架橋性基のみからなってもよいし、架橋性基の他に連結基を含んでいてもよい。特に、架橋性基を有する基は、-L0-P0で表される基が好ましい。ここで、L0は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、P1は、架橋性基を表す。
 架橋性基は、上述した架橋性基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 2価の連結基は、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-CO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OC-、-SO-、-SO2-およびこれらを2以上組み合わせた基が好ましい。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。
 特に、2価の連結基は、アルキレン基が好ましい。
 アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよい。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、5~20がさらに好ましく、5~10が特に好ましい。具体的には、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ヘキシレン基、ヘプシレン基、シクロペンテニレン基、シクロへキシレン基等が好ましい。
 アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~18がより好ましく、6~12がさらに好ましい。具体的に、アリーレン基は、フェニレン基、ナフタレン基等が好ましい。
Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each preferably have a crosslinkable group, and Rtp 71 or Rtp 72 preferably has a crosslinkable group.
The group having a crosslinkable group may comprise only a crosslinkable group, or may contain a linking group in addition to the crosslinkable group. In particular, the group having a crosslinkable group is preferably a group represented by -L 0 -P 0 . Here, L 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and P 1 represents a crosslinkable group.
A crosslinkable group is synonymous with the crosslinkable group mentioned above, and its preferable range is also the same.
The divalent linking group includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR. —, —OC—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and a combination of two or more thereof are preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
In particular, the divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group.
The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 5 to 20, and particularly preferably 5 to 10. Specifically, a methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, hexylene group, hepsylene group, cyclopentenylene group, cyclohexylene group and the like are preferable.
The number of carbon atoms of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18, and still more preferably 6 to 12. Specifically, the arylene group is preferably a phenylene group or a naphthalene group.
 上記トリアリールメタン構造は、カチオンが以下のように非局在化して存在しており、下記2種の構造は同義であり、いずれも本発明に含まれるものとする。なお、カチオン部位は、分子中のどの位置にあってもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
In the triarylmethane structure, cations are delocalized as follows, and the following two structures are synonymous, and both are included in the present invention. The cation moiety may be at any position in the molecule.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
置換基群A:
 置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、シクロアルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、シリルオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アミノ基(アルキルアミノ基、アニリノ基を含む)、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、スルファモイル基、スルホ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基などが挙げられる。以下詳細に記述する。
Substituent group A:
Substituents include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, alkenyl groups, cycloalkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heterocyclic groups, cyano groups, hydroxy groups, nitro groups, carboxyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups. Silyloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, amino group (including alkylamino group and anilino group), acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfa Moylamino group, alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, sulfo group, alkyl or arylsulfinyl group, alkyl or arylsulfonyl , Acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, aryl or heterocyclic azo group, imide group, phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, silyl group, etc. . Details are described below.
 ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキル基(直鎖または分岐の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基で、好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキル基であり、例えばメチル、エチル、n-プロピル、イソプロピル、tert-ブチル、n-オクチル、2-クロロエチル、2-シアノエチル、2-エチルヘキシル)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは、炭素数3~30の置換または無置換のシクロアルキル基、例えば、シクロヘキシル、シクロペンチルが挙げられ、多シクロアルキル基、例えば、ビシクロアルキル基(好ましくは、炭素数5~30の置換もしくは無置換のビシクロアルキル基で、例えば、ビシクロ[1,2,2]ヘプタン-2-イル、ビシクロ[2,2,2]オクタン-3-イル)やトリシクロアルキル基等の多環構造の基が挙げられる。好ましくは単環のシクロアルキル基、ビシクロアルキル基であり、単環のシクロアルキル基が特に好ましい。)、 A halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), a linear or branched alkyl group (a linear or branched substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) For example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, 2-chloroethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, 2-ethylhexyl), a cycloalkyl group (preferably substituted with 3 to 30 carbon atoms or Examples thereof include unsubstituted cycloalkyl groups such as cyclohexyl and cyclopentyl, and polycycloalkyl groups such as bicycloalkyl groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl groups having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [ 1,2,2] heptan-2-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] octane- - yl) or group of polycyclic structures such as tricycloalkyl groups is preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group, a bicycloalkyl group, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group is particularly preferred),..
 直鎖もしくは分岐のアルケニル基(直鎖または分岐の置換もしくは無置換のアルケニル基で、好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルケニル基であり、例えば、ビニル、アリル、プレニル、ゲラニル、オレイル)、シクロアルケニル基(好ましくは、炭素数3~30の置換もしくは無置換のシクロアルケニル基で、例えば、2-シクロペンテン-1-イル、2-シクロヘキセン-1-イルが挙げられ、多シクロアルケニル基、例えば、ビシクロアルケニル基(好ましくは、炭素数5~30の置換もしくは無置換のビシクロアルケニル基で、例えば、ビシクロ[2,2,1]ヘプト-2-エン-1-イル、ビシクロ[2,2,2]オクト-2-エン-4-イル)やトリシクロアルケニル基であり、単環のシクロアルケニル基が特に好ましい。)アルキニル基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のアルキニル基、例えば、エチニル、プロパルギル、トリメチルシリルエチニル基)、 Linear or branched alkenyl group (straight or branched substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl, oleyl), cycloalkenyl A group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms such as 2-cyclopenten-1-yl and 2-cyclohexen-1-yl, and a polycycloalkenyl group such as bicyclo An alkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] Octo-2-en-4-yl) and tricycloalkenyl groups, with monocyclic cycloalkenyl groups being particularly preferred. Cycloalkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, e.g., ethynyl, propargyl, trimethylsilylethynyl group),
 アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリール基で、例えばフェニル、p-トリル、ナフチル、m-クロロフェニル、o-ヘキサデカノイルアミノフェニル)、ヘテロ環基(好ましくは5~7員の置換もしくは無置換、飽和もしくは不飽和、芳香族もしくは非芳香族、単環もしくは縮環のヘテロ環基であり、より好ましくは、環構成原子が炭素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子から選択され、かつ窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子のいずれかのヘテロ原子を少なくとも一個有するヘテロ環基であり、さらに好ましくは、炭素数3~30の5もしくは6員の芳香族のヘテロ環基である。例えば、2-フリル、2-チエニル、2-ピリジル、4-ピリジル、2-ピリミジニル、2-ベンゾチアゾリル)、シアノ基、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、カルボキシル基、 An aryl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl, o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl), a heterocyclic group (preferably 5 to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, more preferably the ring-constituting atom is selected from carbon atom, nitrogen atom and sulfur atom And a heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of any one of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms For example, 2-furyl, 2-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 2-benzothiazolyl), cyano group, Proxy group, a nitro group, a carboxyl group,
 アルコキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルコキシ基で、例えば、メトキシ、エトキシ、イソプロポキシ、tert-ブトキシ、n-オクチルオキシ、2-メトキシエトキシ)、アリールオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシ、2-メチルフェノキシ、2,4-ジ-tert-アミルフェノキシ、4-tert-ブチルフェノキシ、3-ニトロフェノキシ、2-テトラデカノイルアミノフェノキシ)、シリルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数3~20のシリルオキシ基で、例えば、トリメチルシリルオキシ、tert-ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ)、ヘテロ環オキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環オキシ基で、ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましく、例えば、1-フェニルテトラゾール-5-オキシ、2-テトラヒドロピラニルオキシ)、 An alkoxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, tert-butoxy, n-octyloxy, 2-methoxyethoxy), aryloxy group (preferably Is a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 2,4-di-tert-amylphenoxy, 4-tert-butylphenoxy, 3-nitrophenoxy, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy), a silyloxy group (preferably a silyloxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as trimethylsilyloxy, tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy), a heterocyclic oxy group (preferably having a carbon number of 2 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic oxy groups , Heterocyclic portion is preferably described in the heterocyclic portion described above heterocyclic group, e.g., 1-phenyl-5-oxy, 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy),
 アシルオキシ基(好ましくはホルミルオキシ基、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニルオキシ基であり、例えば、ホルミルオキシ、アセチルオキシ、ピバロイルオキシ、ステアロイルオキシ、ベンゾイルオキシ、p-メトキシフェニルカルボニルオキシ)、カルバモイルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のカルバモイルオキシ基で、例えば、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイルオキシ、N,N-ジエチルカルバモイルオキシ、モルホリノカルボニルオキシ、N,N-ジ-n-オクチルアミノカルボニルオキシ、N-n-オクチルカルバモイルオキシ)、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基で、例えばメトキシカルボニルオキシ、エトキシカルボニルオキシ、tert-ブトキシカルボニルオキシ、n-オクチルカルボニルオキシ)、アリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数7~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルオキシ、p-メトキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ、p-n-ヘキサデシルオキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ)、 An acyloxy group (preferably a formyloxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formyloxy, acetyloxy , Pivaloyloxy, stearoyloxy, benzoyloxy, p-methoxyphenylcarbonyloxy), a carbamoyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy, N, N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbonyloxy, N, N-di-n-octylaminocarbonyloxy, Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a substituent having 2 to 30 carbon atoms) Or an unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyloxy group such as methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonyloxy, tert-butoxycarbonyloxy, n-octylcarbonyloxy), an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms). Substituted aryloxycarbonyloxy groups such as phenoxycarbonyloxy, p-methoxyphenoxycarbonyloxy, pn-hexadecyloxyphenoxycarbonyloxy),
 アミノ基(好ましくは、アミノ基、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールアミノ基、炭素数0~30のヘテロ環アミノ基であり、例えば、アミノ、メチルアミノ、ジメチルアミノ、アニリノ、N-メチル-アニリノ、ジフェニルアミノ、N-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イルアミノ)、アシルアミノ基(好ましくは、ホルミルアミノ基、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルカルボニルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニルアミノ基であり、例えば、ホルミルアミノ、アセチルアミノ、ピバロイルアミノ、ラウロイルアミノ、ベンゾイルアミノ、3,4,5-トリ-n-オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニルアミノ)、アミノカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアミノカルボニルアミノ基、例えば、カルバモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、N,N-ジエチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、モルホリノカルボニルアミノ)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニルアミノ、エトキシカルボニルアミノ、tert-ブトキシカルボニルアミノ、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニルアミノ、N-メチル-メトキシカルボニルアミノ)、 An amino group (preferably an amino group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms); For example, amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, N-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino), acylamino group (preferably formylamino group, carbon number A substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino, benzoylamino, 3, 4,5-tri-n-octyloxyphenylcarbonylamino), amino A carbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aminocarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as carbamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminocarbonylamino, N, N-diethylaminocarbonylamino, morpholinocarbonylamino), An alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, tert-butoxycarbonylamino, n-octadecyloxycarbonylamino, N-methyl- Methoxycarbonylamino),
 アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数7~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ、p-クロロフェノキシカルボニルアミノ、m-n-オクチルオキシフェノキシカルボニルアミノ)、スルファモイルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数0~30の置換もしくは無置換のスルファモイルアミノ基で、例えば、スルファモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノスルホニルアミノ、N-n-オクチルアミノスルホニルアミノ)、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルスルホニルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールスルホニルアミノ基であり、例えば、メチルスルホニルアミノ、ブチルスルホニルアミノ、フェニルスルホニルアミノ、2,3,5-トリクロロフェニルスルホニルアミノ、p-メチルフェニルスルホニルアミノ)、メルカプト基、 Aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonylamino, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino, mn-octyloxyphenoxycarbonylamino) Sulfamoylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms such as sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, Nn-octylamino Sulfonylamino), alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group (preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methyl Sulfonyl Mino, butyl sulfonylamino, phenylsulfonylamino, 2,3,5-trichlorophenyl sulfonylamino, p- methylphenyl sulfonylamino), a mercapto group,
 アルキルチオ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルチオ基で、例えばメチルチオ、エチルチオ、n-ヘキサデシルチオ)、アリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールチオ基で、例えば、フェニルチオ、p-クロロフェニルチオ、m-メトキシフェニルチオ)、ヘテロ環チオ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のヘテロ環チオ基で、ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましく、例えば、2-ベンゾチアゾリルチオ、1-フェニルテトラゾール-5-イルチオ)、スルファモイル基(好ましくは炭素数0~30の置換もしくは無置換のスルファモイル基で、例えば、N-エチルスルファモイル、N-(3-ドデシルオキシプロピル)スルファモイル、N,N-ジメチルスルファモイル、N-アセチルスルファモイル、N-ベンゾイルスルファモイル、N-(N’-フェニルカルバモイル)スルファモイル)、スルホ基、 An alkylthio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methylthio, ethylthio, n-hexadecylthio), an arylthio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms). , For example, phenylthio, p-chlorophenylthio, m-methoxyphenylthio), a heterocyclic thio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic thio group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, wherein the heterocyclic moiety is the aforementioned heterocyclic group The heterocyclic portion described in the above is preferably, for example, 2-benzothiazolylthio, 1-phenyltetrazol-5-ylthio), a sulfamoyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, N-ethylsulfamoyl, N- (3-dodecyloxypropyl) sulfur Moil, N, N- dimethylsulfamoyl, N- acetyl sulfamoyl, N- benzoylsulfamoyl, N- (N'-phenylcarbamoyl) sulfamoyl), a sulfo group,
 アルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルスルフィニル基、6~30の置換または無置換のアリールスルフィニル基であり、例えば、メチルスルフィニル、エチルスルフィニル、フェニルスルフィニル、p-メチルフェニルスルフィニル)、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルスルホニル基、6~30の置換または無置換のアリールスルホニル基であり、例えば、メチルスルホニル、エチルスルホニル、フェニルスルホニル、p-メチルフェニルスルホニル)、アシル基(好ましくはホルミル基、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のアルキルカルボニル基、炭素数7~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニル基であり、例えば、アセチル、ピバロイル、2-クロロアセチル、ステアロイル、ベンゾイル、p-n-オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニル)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは、炭素数7~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニル基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニル、o-クロロフェノキシカルボニル、m-ニトロフェノキシカルボニル、p-tert-ブチルフェノキシカルボニル)、 An alkyl or arylsulfinyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, p-methylphenylsulfinyl), an alkyl or arylsulfonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfonyl , Ethylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, p-methylphenylsulfonyl), acyl group (preferably formyl group, substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbocycle having 7 to 30 carbon atoms) For example, acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-chloroacetyl, stearoyl, benzoyl, pn-octyloxyphenylcarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl having 7 to 30 carbon atoms) An oxycarbonyl group, for example, phenoxycarbonyl, o-chlorophenoxycarbonyl, m-nitrophenoxycarbonyl, p-tert-butylphenoxycarbonyl),
 アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換アルコキシカルボニル基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル、tert-ブトキシカルボニル、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニル)、カルバモイル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のカルバモイル、例えば、カルバモイル、N-メチルカルバモイル、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイル、N,N-ジ-n-オクチルカルバモイル、N-(メチルスルホニル)カルバモイル)、アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールアゾ基、炭素数3~30の置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環アゾ基(ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましい)、例えば、フェニルアゾ、p-クロロフェニルアゾ、5-エチルチオ-1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2-イルアゾ)、イミド基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のイミド基で、例えばN-スクシンイミド、N-フタルイミド)、ホスフィノ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィノ基、例えば、ジメチルホスフィノ、ジフェニルホスフィノ、メチルフェノキシホスフィノ)、ホスフィニル基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニル基で、例えば、ホスフィニル、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニル、ジエトキシホスフィニル)、 An alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (preferably having a carbon number) 1-30 substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl such as carbamoyl, N-methylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N, N-di-n-octylcarbamoyl, N- (methylsulfonyl) carbamoyl), aryl or hetero A ring azo group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylazo group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic azo group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms (the heterocycle portion is the heterocycle described in the above heterocyclic group); Ring portion is preferred), for example, phenyl Azo, p-chlorophenylazo, 5-ethylthio-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylazo), an imide group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted imide group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as N-succinimide, N-phthalimide), a phosphino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as dimethylphosphino, diphenylphosphino, methylphenoxyphosphino), a phosphinyl group (preferably having 2 carbon atoms) Up to 30 substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyl groups such as phosphinyl, dioctyloxyphosphinyl, diethoxyphosphinyl),
 ホスフィニルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニルオキシ基で、例えば、ジフェノキシホスフィニルオキシ、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニルオキシ)、ホスフィニルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニルアミノ基で、例えば、ジメトキシホスフィニルアミノ、ジメチルアミノホスフィニルアミノ)、シリル基(好ましくは、炭素数3~30の置換もしくは無置換のシリル基で、例えば、トリメチルシリル、tert-ブチルジメチルシリル、フェニルジメチルシリル)が挙げられる。 A phosphinyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as diphenoxyphosphinyloxy, dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy), a phosphinylamino group ( Preferably, it is a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, for example, dimethoxyphosphinylamino, dimethylaminophosphinylamino), a silyl group (preferably a substitution having 3 to 30 carbon atoms) Or, an unsubstituted silyl group, for example, trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, phenyldimethylsilyl).
 架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造の具体例として以下の構造を挙げることができるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation include the following structures, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
<<対アニオン>>
 対アニオンは、上記トリアリールメタン構造が有するカチオンの対アニオンである。対アニオンは、対アニオンのみからなっていてもよいし、化合物の構造の一部として含まれていてもよい。
<< Counter anion >>
The counter anion is a cation counter anion of the triarylmethane structure. The counter anion may consist only of the counter anion or may be included as part of the structure of the compound.
 対アニオンのみからなる場合、フッ素アニオン、塩素アニオン、臭素アニオン、ヨウ素アニオン、シアン化物イオン、過塩素酸アニオン、ボレートアニオン(BF4-等)、PF6-およびSbF6-等が挙げられ、ボレートアニオンおよびPF6-が好ましい。
 対アニオンが、化合物の構造の一部として含まれる場合としては、架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造とは別に、カウンターアニオンとして存在している場合が挙げられる。
In the case of consisting only of a counter anion, examples include a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, a borate anion (BF 4− etc.), PF 6− and SbF 6−. Anions and PF 6− are preferred.
As a case where the counter anion is included as a part of the structure of the compound, there is a case where it exists as a counter anion separately from the triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation and having a molecular weight of 2000 or less.
 ボレートアニオンとしては、B(R104-で表される基であり、R10は、フッ素原子、シアノ基、フッ化アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基等が例示される。 The borate anion is a group represented by B (R 10 ) 4− , and R 10 is exemplified by a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a fluorinated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and the like.
 対アニオンが化合物の構造の一部として含まれる場合としては、繰り返し単位を有する重合体の一部に含まれていても、分子量が2000以下の、いわゆる低分子化合物に含まれていても良い。低分子化合物の場合、アニオン部位と共に、アルキル基、アリール基および架橋性基の少なくとも1種が含まれる態様が例示される。本発明では、特に、対アニオンが、架橋性基を含む化合物中に含まれる態様、および、対アニオンが繰り返し単位中に含まれる態様が好ましく、対アニオンが繰り返し単位中に含まれる態様がより好ましい。 The case where the counter anion is contained as a part of the structure of the compound may be contained in a part of the polymer having a repeating unit or may be contained in a so-called low molecular compound having a molecular weight of 2000 or less. In the case of a low molecular weight compound, an embodiment in which at least one of an alkyl group, an aryl group and a crosslinkable group is included together with the anion moiety is exemplified. In the present invention, in particular, an embodiment in which the counter anion is contained in the compound containing a crosslinkable group and an embodiment in which the counter anion is contained in the repeating unit are preferred, and an embodiment in which the counter anion is contained in the repeating unit is more preferred. .
 対アニオンが化合物の構造の一部として含まれる場合、アニオン部は、-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、下記一般式(A1)で表される構造および下記一般式(A2)で表される構造から選択される少なくとも1種が好ましい。 When a counter anion is included as part of the structure of the compound, the anion moiety is —SO 3 , —COO , —PO 4 , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1), and a general formula (A2) At least one selected from the structure represented by
一般式(A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-または-CO-を表す。)
 一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2の少なくとも1つが-SO2-を表すことが好ましく、R1およびR2の両方が-SO2-を表すことがより好ましい。
General formula (A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(In the general formula (A1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.)
In formula (A1), at least one of R 1 and R 2 -SO 2 - preferably represents an, both R 1 and R 2 are -SO 2 - and more preferably represents.
 上記一般式(A1)は、下記一般式(A1-1)で表されることがより好ましい。
一般式(A1-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
(一般式(A1-1)中、R1およびR2はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-または-CO-を表す。X1およびX2は、それぞれ独立してアルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表す。)
 一般式(A1-1)中、R1およびR2は、一般式(A1)中のR1およびR2と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 X1がアルキレン基を表す場合、アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~8が好ましく、1~6がより好ましい。X1がアリーレン基を表す場合、アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6がさらに好ましい。X1が置換基を有する場合、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。
 X2は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~8が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましく、1が特に好ましい。X2が置換基を有する場合、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。
The general formula (A1) is more preferably represented by the following general formula (A1-1).
Formula (A1-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
(In General Formula (A1-1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent —SO 2 — or —CO—, and X 1 and X 2 each independently represent an alkylene group or an arylene group. )
In formula (A1-1), R 1 and R 2 of the general formula (A1) in the same meaning as R 1 and R 2, and preferred ranges are also the same.
When X 1 represents an alkylene group, the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. When X 1 represents an arylene group, the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 18, more preferably 6 to 12, and still more preferably 6. When X 1 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
X 2 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1. When X 2 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
一般式(A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
(一般式(A2)中、R3は、-SO2-または-CO-を表す。R4およびR5はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-、-CO-または-CNを表す。)
 一般式(A2)中、R3~R5の少なくとも1つが-SO2-を表すことが好ましく、R3~R5の少なくとも2つが-SO2-を表すことがより好ましい。
General formula (A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
(In the general formula (A2), R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—. R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.)
Preferably representing the at least two R 3 ~ R 5 is -SO 2 - - In formula (A2), at least one of R 3 ~ R 5 -SO 2 more preferably represents.
 対アニオンが化合物の構造の一部として含まれる場合の具体例としては、R-SO3 -、R-COO-またはR-PO4 -であって、Rが、ハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアルキル基、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアリール基である場合も例示される。
 また、上記一般式(A1)で表される基を含む化合物の具体例としては、R1がハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアルキル基、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアリール基と結合している化合物が例示される。
 また、上記一般式(A2)で表される基を含む化合物の具体例としては、R4およびR5が、それぞれ、ハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアルキル基、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアリール基である場合が例示される。
 特に、以下の態様が好ましい。一般式(A1-1)で表される基を含む化合物であって、一般式(A1-1)中のR1およびR2が-SO2-を表し、X1およびX2の少なくとも一方がアルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表す態様。一般式(A2)で表される基を含む化合物であって、一般式(A2)中のR4およびR5が、ハロゲン原子で置換されているアルキル基と結合している態様。-PO4 -または-SO3 -が化合物の構造の一部として含まれる態様。塩素アニオン、シアン化物イオン、BF4-またはPF6-
 その他の対アニオンの具体例としては、以下が挙げられるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。本明細書において、以下のその他の対アニオンの具体例を「対アニオンA」という。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Specific examples where the counter anion is included as part of the structure of the compound are R—SO 3 , R—COO or R—PO 4 , wherein R is substituted with a halogen atom or halogen atom. Examples are an alkyl group which may be substituted and an aryl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom.
Specific examples of the compound containing the group represented by the general formula (A1) include R 1 as a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, and an aryl which may be substituted with a halogen atom. Examples are compounds bonded to a group.
As specific examples of the compound containing the group represented by the general formula (A2), R 4 and R 5 are each substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, or a halogen atom. The case where it is the aryl group which may be made is illustrated.
In particular, the following embodiments are preferable. A compound containing a group represented by the general formula (A1-1), wherein R 1 and R 2 in the general formula (A1-1) represent —SO 2 —, and at least one of X 1 and X 2 is An embodiment representing an alkylene group or an arylene group. A compound containing a group represented by the general formula (A2), wherein R 4 and R 5 in the general formula (A2) are bonded to an alkyl group substituted with a halogen atom. An embodiment in which —PO 4 or —SO 3 is included as part of the structure of the compound. Chlorine anion, cyanide ion, BF 4− or PF 6− .
Specific examples of other counter anions include the following, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In this specification, the following other specific examples of the counter anion are referred to as “counter anion A”.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 以下、対アニオンが架橋性基を含む化合物中に含まれる場合、対アニオンが繰り返し単位中に含まれる場合について、詳細に説明する。
 架橋性基としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な架橋性基が挙げられ、上述したトリアリールメタン構造が有する架橋性基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 架橋性基を含む化合物中の架橋性基の数は、1~3が好ましく、1がより好ましい。
Hereinafter, when the counter anion is contained in the compound containing a crosslinkable group, the case where the counter anion is contained in the repeating unit will be described in detail.
Examples of the crosslinkable group include a crosslinkable group that can be cross-linked by a radical, an acid, and heat.
The number of crosslinkable groups in the compound containing a crosslinkable group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
 また、架橋性基と対アニオンとの間は、直接結合していてもよいし、連結基を介して結合していてもよいが、連結基を介して結合していることが好ましい。
 対アニオンが架橋性基を含む化合物中に含まれる場合の具体例は、下記一般式(B)で表されることが好ましい。
Further, the crosslinkable group and the counter anion may be directly bonded or may be bonded via a linking group, but are preferably bonded via a linking group.
It is preferable that the specific example in case a counter anion is contained in the compound containing a crosslinkable group is represented by the following general formula (B).
一般式(B)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
(一般式(B)中、Pは架橋性基を表す。Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表す。anionは、上記対アニオンを表す。)
 一般式(B)中、Pは架橋性基を表し、上述した架橋性基が挙げられる。
 一般式(B)中、Lが2価の連結基を表す場合、炭素数1~30のアルキレン基(例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基等)、炭素数6~30のアリーレン基、ヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-CO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OC-、-SO-、-SO2-およびこれらを2以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。
 特に、連結基は、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基(好ましくは、-(CH2)n-(nは1~10の整数)、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基(好ましくはフェニレン基、ナフタレン基)、-NH-、-CO-、-O-および-SO2-を2以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。
General formula (B)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
(In general formula (B), P represents a crosslinkable group. L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Anion represents the counter anion.)
In general formula (B), P represents a crosslinkable group, and examples thereof include the crosslinkable groups described above.
In the general formula (B), when L represents a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (for example, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a trimethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, etc.), a carbon number of 6 to 30 arylene groups, heterocyclic linking groups, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OC—, —SO —, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
In particular, the linking group is an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably — (CH 2 ) n— (n is an integer of 1 to 10), an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably a phenylene group or naphthalene). Group), —NH—, —CO—, —O— and —SO 2 — are preferred.
<<他の官能基>>
 対アニオンが化合物の構造の一部として含まれている場合、架橋性基以外の他の官能基を有していてもよい。他の官能基としては、上述したカチオンを含むトリアリールメタン構造を有する繰り返し単位で説明した他の官能基が挙げられ、好ましい例も同義である。 対アニオンが化合物の構造の一部として含まれている場合、化合物中の重合性基の数は、1~3が好ましく、1がより好ましい。
 対アニオンが化合物の構造の一部として含まれている場合、化合物中の酸基の数は1~3が好ましく、1がより好ましい。
<< other functional groups >>
When a counter anion is included as part of the structure of the compound, it may have a functional group other than the crosslinkable group. Other functional groups include other functional groups described in the above-described repeating unit having a triarylmethane structure containing a cation, and preferred examples are also synonymous. When the counter anion is included as part of the structure of the compound, the number of polymerizable groups in the compound is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
When the counter anion is included as part of the structure of the compound, the number of acid groups in the compound is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
 対アニオンが架橋性基を含む化合物中に含まれる場合の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples in the case where the counter anion is contained in a compound containing a crosslinkable group are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 架橋性基を含む化合物の分子量は200~2000が好ましく、200~500がより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the compound containing a crosslinkable group is preferably 200 to 2000, and more preferably 200 to 500.
 対アニオンが繰り返し単位中に含まれる場合(以下、アニオン多量体ともいう)、側鎖に対アニオンを有していてもよいし、主鎖に対アニオンを有していてもよし、主鎖および側鎖の両方に対アニオンを有していてもよい。
 アニオン多量体は、下記一般式(C)および/または下記一般式(D)で表されることが好ましい。
When the counter anion is contained in the repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as anion multimer), the side chain may have a counter anion, the main chain may have a counter anion, and the main chain and You may have a counter anion in both of the side chains.
The anion multimer is preferably represented by the following general formula (C) and / or the following general formula (D).
一般式(C)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
(一般式(C)中、X1は、繰り返し単位の主鎖を表す。L1は単結合または2価の連結基を表す。anionは、上記対アニオンを表す。)
General formula (C)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
(In general formula (C), X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit. L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Anion represents the counter anion.)
 一般式(C)中、X1は、繰り返し単位の主鎖を表し、通常、重合反応で形成される連結基を表し、例えば、(メタ)アクリル系、スチレン系、ビニル系等が好ましい。なお、2つの*で表された部位が繰り返し単位となる。 In the general formula (C), X 1 represents a main chain of repeating units, usually represents a linking group formed by polymerization reaction, for example, (meth) acrylic, styrene, vinyl and the like are preferable. Two sites represented by * are repeating units.
 L1が2価の連結基を表す場合、炭素数1~30のアルキレン基(メチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基など)、炭素数6~30のアリーレン基(フェニレン基、ナフタレン基等)、ヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-CO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OC-、-SO-、-SO2-およびこれらを2以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。
 特に、L1は、単結合、または、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基(好ましくは、-(CH2)n-(nは5~10の整数)、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基(好ましくはフェニレン基、ナフタレン基)、-NH-、-CO2-、-O-および-SO2-を2以上組み合わせた2価の連結基が好ましい。
When L 1 represents a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, etc.), an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (phenylene group, Naphthalene group, etc.), heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OC—, —SO —, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
In particular, L 1 is a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably — (CH 2 ) n— (n is an integer of 5 to 10), an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably phenylene group, naphthalene group) is, - NH -, - CO 2 -, - O- and -SO 2 - is a divalent linking group formed by combining two or more preferred.
 X1およびL1の組み合わせの具体例としては、下記(XX-1)~(X-30)が挙げられるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。なお、アニオン多量体は、(XX-1)~(X-30)中の*で示された部位で上記対アニオンと連結している。 Specific examples of the combination of X 1 and L 1 include the following (XX-1) to (X-30), but the present invention is not limited to these. The anion multimer is linked to the counter anion at the site indicated by * in (XX-1) to (X-30).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 また、X1およびL1の組み合わせの具体例としては以下も好ましい。下記具体例中、nは、1~9の整数を表す。また、*で示された部位で上記対アニオンと連結していることを表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Moreover, the following is also preferable as a specific example of the combination of X 1 and L 1 . In the following specific examples, n represents an integer of 1 to 9. Moreover, it represents connecting with the counter anion at the site indicated by *.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
一般式(D)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
(一般式(D)中、L2およびL3は、それぞれ独立して単結合または2価の連結基を表す。anionは、上記対アニオンを表す。)
Formula (D)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
(In general formula (D), L 2 and L 3 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group. Anion represents the counter anion.)
 一般式(D)中、L2およびL3が2価の連結基を表す場合、炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、炭素数6~30のアリーレン基、ヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-CO2-、-NR-、-CONR-、-O2C-、-SO-、-SO2-およびこれらを2以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。
 L2は、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基(特にフェニレン基)が好ましい。炭素数6~30のアリーレン基は、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。
 L3は、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基(特にフェニレン基)と-O-との組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、少なくとも1種の炭素数6~12のアリーレン基がフッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。
In the general formula (D), when L 2 and L 3 represent a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH— , —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —CO 2 —, —NR—, —CONR—, —O 2 C—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and combinations of two or more thereof The linking group is preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
L 2 is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group). The arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
L 3 is preferably a group composed of a combination of an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group) and —O—, and at least one arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is substituted with a fluorine atom. It is preferable.
 アニオン多量体を形成する高分子としては、架橋性基を有する染料化合物成分からのみ構成されるホモポリマー(単独重合体)でも、その他重合性化合物とのコポリマー(共重合体)でも好ましく用いることが出来るが、ホモポリマー(単独重合体)がより好ましい。
 アニオン多量体の分子量としては、重量平均分子量が3,000~30,000かつ、分子量分布がMw/Mnで0.8~3.0であることが好ましく、より好ましくは重量平均分子量が5,000~20,000かつ、分子量分布がMw/Mnで1~2.5である。
As a polymer that forms an anion multimer, a homopolymer (homopolymer) composed only of a dye compound component having a crosslinkable group or a copolymer (copolymer) with other polymerizable compound is preferably used. A homopolymer (homopolymer) is more preferable.
The molecular weight of the anionic multimer is preferably a weight average molecular weight of 3,000 to 30,000 and a molecular weight distribution of Mw / Mn of 0.8 to 3.0, more preferably a weight average molecular weight of 5, The molecular weight distribution is 1 to 2.5 in terms of Mw / Mn.
 アニオン多量体を形成する場合、連鎖移動剤を添加してもよい。連鎖移動剤としては、アルキルメルカプタンが好ましく、炭素数10以下のアルキルメルカプタンまたはエーテル基・エステル基で置換されたアルキルメルカプタンが好ましい。特に、logP値が5以下のアルキルメルカプタンがより好ましい。
 アニオン多量体に含まれるアニオン多量体の原料である架橋性基を有するアニオンモノマー化合物の量は、5%以下が好ましく、より好ましくは、1%以下である。
 アニオン多量体に含まれるハロゲンイオン含有量としては、10~3000ppm以下が好ましく、10~2000ppmがより好ましく、10~1000ppmがさらに好ましい。
 アニオン多量体の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
When forming an anionic multimer, a chain transfer agent may be added. The chain transfer agent is preferably an alkyl mercaptan, and is preferably an alkyl mercaptan having 10 or less carbon atoms or an alkyl mercaptan substituted with an ether group / ester group. In particular, an alkyl mercaptan having a log P value of 5 or less is more preferable.
The amount of the anionic monomer compound having a crosslinkable group that is a raw material of the anionic multimer contained in the anionic multimer is preferably 5% or less, more preferably 1% or less.
The halogen ion content contained in the anionic multimer is preferably 10 to 3000 ppm, more preferably 10 to 2000 ppm, and even more preferably 10 to 1000 ppm.
Specific examples of the anion multimer are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 以下の具体例は、アニオン構造が解離していない状態を示しているが、アニオン構造が解離している状態も本発明の範囲内であることは言うまでもない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
The following specific examples show a state where the anion structure is not dissociated, but it goes without saying that the state where the anion structure is dissociated is also within the scope of the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 対アニオンが高分子である場合、他の繰り返し単位を有していても良い。 When the counter anion is a polymer, it may have other repeating units.
 対アニオンがアニオン多量体を含有する場合、アニオン多量体の量は、本発明に用いられる着色剤中の全繰り返し単位100モルに対し、1~50モルが好ましく、10~30モルがより好ましい。
 また、アニオン多量体が、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位をさらに含有する場合、その量は、全繰り返し単位100モルに対し、例えば、10~50モルが好ましく、10~30モルがより好ましい。
When the counter anion contains an anion multimer, the amount of the anion multimer is preferably from 1 to 50 mol, more preferably from 10 to 30 mol, based on 100 mol of all repeating units in the colorant used in the present invention.
Further, when the anionic multimer further contains a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, the amount thereof is, for example, preferably 10 to 50 mol, more preferably 10 to 30 mol, relative to 100 mol of all repeating units.
 重合性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、以下のような具体例が挙げられる。ただし、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group include the following. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 アニオン多量体が、酸基を有する繰り返し単位をさらに含有する場合、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含有する繰り返し単位の割合は、全繰り返し単位100モルに対し、例えば、10~50モルが好ましく、10~30モルがより好ましい。 When the anionic multimer further contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the ratio of the repeating unit containing a repeating unit having an acid group is preferably, for example, 10 to 50 mol with respect to 100 mol of all repeating units. More preferred is 30 mol.
 その他、ラクトン、酸無水物、アミド、-COCH2CO-、シアノ基等の現像促進基、長鎖および環状アルキル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、ポリアルキレンオキシド基、ヒドロキシ基、マレイミド基、アミノ基等の親疏水性調整基等の官能基を有する繰り返し単位を含んでいても良い。 Other development accelerators such as lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, —COCH 2 CO—, cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryl groups, polyalkylene oxide groups, hydroxy groups, maleimide groups, amino groups It may contain a repeating unit having a functional group such as an affinity control group.
 以下に、他の繰り返し単位の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of other repeating units are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
<<着色剤の具体例>>
 以下に、本発明に用いられる第1の実施の形態の着色剤の具体例を示すが、これらに限定されるものではない。
 下記化合物中(D-21)は、架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造が、対アニオンの繰り返し単位に相当する数だけ存在する。
<< Specific examples of colorants >>
Although the specific example of the coloring agent of 1st Embodiment used for this invention below is shown, it is not limited to these.
In the following compound (D-21), a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation and having a molecular weight of 2000 or less exists in a number corresponding to the repeating unit of the counter anion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
着色剤の第2の実施の形態
 着色剤の第2の実施の形態は、架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造が、一般式(TP1A)または一般式(TP2A)で表されることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。Rtp5、Rtp6、Rtp8、Rtp9及びRtp11は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表す。Rtp7は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基又はNRtp71Rtp72を表す。Rtp71及びRtp72は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。Rtp10は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。a、b及びcは、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表す。a、b及びcが2以上の場合、Rtp6、Rtp7及びRtp8のうち2つは、互いに、連結して環を形成してもよい。Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかに架橋性基を有する。Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P)で置換されていてもよい。)
一般式(P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
(一般式(P)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、X1は-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、下記一般式(A1)で表される構造を含む基および下記一般式(A2)で表される構造を含む基から選択される少なくとも1種から選択される。
一般式(A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
(一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-または-CO-を表す。)
一般式(A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
(一般式(A2)中、R3は、-SO2-または-CO-を表す。R4およびR5はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-、-CO-または-CNを表す。)
Second Embodiment of Colorant In a second embodiment of the colorant, a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation and having a molecular weight of 2000 or less is represented by the general formula (TP1A) or the general formula (TP2A). It is preferred that
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(In the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72. Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4. When a, b and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and two of Rtp 8 is, .Rtp 1 ~ Rtp 11 with each other linked to the crosslinkable group in any of which may form a ring .Rtp 1 ~ Rtp 11, Rtp 71 and Rtp 72, Rt at least one p 71 and Rtp 72, but the general formula (P) may be substituted.)
General formula (P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
(In the general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and X 1 represents —SO 3 , —COO , —PO 4 , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1). It is selected from at least one selected from a group containing and a group containing a structure represented by the following general formula (A2).
General formula (A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
(In the general formula (A1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.)
General formula (A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
(In the general formula (A2), R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—. R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.)
 一般式(TP1A)および(TP2A)において、Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P)で置換されていてもよい点以外は、上述した第1の実施の形態における架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In the general formulas (TP1A) and (TP2A), except that at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 may be substituted with the general formula (P), the first implementation described above It is synonymous with a triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation in the form, and the preferred range is also the same.
 一般式(P)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表す。Lが2価の連結基を表す場合、以下に挙げる基の少なくとも1つの水素原子が、X1で置換された2価の連結基であることが好ましい。
 アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、シクロアルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、シリルオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アミノ基(アルキルアミノ基、アニリノ基を含む)、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、スルファモイル基、スルホ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基、エーテル基、チオエーテル基。
In general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When L represents a divalent linking group, it is preferable that at least one hydrogen atom of the following groups is a divalent linking group substituted with X 1 .
Alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, carboxyl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, silyloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, amino Groups (including alkylamino groups and anilino groups), acylamino groups, aminocarbonylamino groups, alkoxycarbonylamino groups, aryloxycarbonylamino groups, sulfamoylamino groups, alkyl or arylsulfonylamino groups, alkylthio groups, arylthio groups, Heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, sulfo group, alkyl or arylsulfinyl group, alkyl or arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl , Aryl or heterocyclic azo group, an imido group, a phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, a silyl group, ether group, thioether group.
 アルキル基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキル基が好ましく、例えばメチル、エチル、n-プロピル、イソプロピル、tert-ブチル、n-オクチル、2-クロロエチル、2-シアノエチル、2-エチルヘキシル基から水素を1つ除いた2価のアルキル基が好ましい。これらアルキル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 シクロアルキル基は、炭素数3~30の置換または無置換のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。例えば、シクロヘキシル、シクロペンチルが挙げられる。また、多シクロアルキル基、例えば、ビシクロアルキル基(好ましくは、炭素数5~30の置換または無置換のビシクロアルキル基で、例えば、ビシクロ[1,2,2]ヘプタン-2-イル、ビシクロ[2,2,2]オクタン-3-イル)やトリシクロアルキル基等の多環構造の基も挙げられる。好ましくは、単環のシクロアルキル基、ビシクロアルキル基であり、単環のシクロアルキル基が特に好ましい。これらシクロアルキル基を2価にするためにX1は、どの位置に導入しても良い。
 アルケニル基は、直鎖状でも分岐状であってもよい。アルケニル基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のアルケニル基が好ましい。例えば、ビニル、アリル、プレニル、ゲラニル、オレイルが特に好ましい。これらアルケニル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 シクロアルケニル基は、炭素数3~30の置換または無置換のシクロアルケニル基が好ましい。例えば、2-シクロペンテン-1-イル、2-シクロヘキセン-1-イルが挙げられ、多シクロアルケニル基、例えば、ビシクロアルケニル基、好ましくは、炭素数5~30のビシクロアルケニル基で、例えば、ビシクロ[2,2,1]ヘプト-2-エン-1-イル、ビシクロ[2,2,2]オクト-2-エン-4-イルやトリシクロアルケニル基であり、単環のシクロアルケニル基が特に好ましい。これらシクロアルケニル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
The alkyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, 2-chloroethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, 2-ethylhexyl A divalent alkyl group obtained by removing one hydrogen from the group is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkyl groups be divalent.
The cycloalkyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include cyclohexyl and cyclopentyl. In addition, a polycycloalkyl group such as a bicycloalkyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [1,2,2] heptan-2-yl, bicyclo [ And 2,2,2] octane-3-yl) and tricyclic groups such as tricycloalkyl groups. A monocyclic cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkyl group are preferable, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group is particularly preferable. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these cycloalkyl groups be divalent.
The alkenyl group may be linear or branched. The alkenyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl and oleyl are particularly preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkenyl groups be divalent.
The cycloalkenyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include 2-cyclopenten-1-yl and 2-cyclohexen-1-yl. A polycycloalkenyl group such as a bicycloalkenyl group, preferably a bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms, such as bicyclo [ 2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] oct-2-en-4-yl and tricycloalkenyl groups, with monocyclic cycloalkenyl groups being particularly preferred . X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these cycloalkenyl groups be divalent.
 アルキニル基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のアルキニル基が好ましく、例えば、エチニル、プロパルギル、トリメチルシリルエチニル基が好ましい。これらアルキニル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アリール基は、炭素数6~30の置換または無置換のアリール基が好ましい。例えば、フェニル、p-トリル、ナフチル、m-クロロフェニル、o-ヘキサデカノイルアミノフェニルが好ましい。これらアリール基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 ヘテロ環基は、5~7員の置換または無置換、飽和または不飽和、芳香族または非芳香族、単環または縮環のヘテロ環基が好ましい。より好ましくは、環構成原子が炭素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子から選択され、かつ窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子のいずれかのヘテロ原子を少なくとも一個有するヘテロ環基であり、さらに好ましくは、炭素数3~30の5または6員の芳香族のヘテロ環基である。例えば、2-フリル、2-チエニル、2-ピリジル、4-ピリジル、2-ピリミジニル、2-ベンゾチアゾリル基が好ましい。これらへテロ環基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アルコキシ基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルコキシ基が好ましく、例えば、メトキシ、エトキシ、イソプロポキシ、tert-ブトキシ、n-オクチルオキシ、2-メトキシエトキシが好ましい。これらアルコキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
The alkynyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propargyl, and trimethylsilylethynyl groups. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkynyl groups be divalent.
The aryl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl and o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryl groups be divalent.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group. More preferably, the ring-constituting atom is a heterocyclic group selected from a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom, and having at least one heteroatom of any of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom, and more preferably a carbon atom A 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group of 3 to 30. For example, 2-furyl, 2-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl and 2-benzothiazolyl groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these heterocyclic groups divalent.
The alkoxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and for example, methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, tert-butoxy, n-octyloxy and 2-methoxyethoxy are preferable. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkoxy groups be divalent.
 アリールオキシ基は、炭素数6~30の置換または無置換のアリールオキシ基が好ましく、例えば、フェノキシ、2-メチルフェノキシ、2,4-ジ-tert-アミルフェノキシ、4-tert-ブチルフェノキシ、3-ニトロフェノキシ、2-テトラデカノイルアミノフェノキシ基が好ましい。これらアリールオキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 シリルオキシ基は、好ましくは、炭素数3~20の置換または無置換のシリルオキシ基が好ましく、例えば、トリメチルシリルオキシ、tert-ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ基が好ましい。これらシリルオキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 ヘテロ環オキシ基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のヘテロ環オキシ基が好ましい。ヘテロ環は、ヘテロ環部は上述したヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましく、例えば、1-フェニルテトラゾール-5-オキシ、2-テトラヒドロピラニルオキシ基が好ましい。これらへテロ環オキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アシルオキシ基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、炭素数6~30の置換または無置換のアリールカルボニルオキシ基が好ましく、例えば、ホルミルオキシ、アセチルオキシ、ピバロイルオキシ、ステアロイルオキシ、ベンゾイルオキシ、p-メトキシフェニルカルボニルオキシ基が好ましい。これらアシルオキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 カルバモイルオキシ基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のカルバモイルオキシ基が好ましく、例えば、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイルオキシ、N,N-ジエチルカルバモイルオキシ、モルホリノカルボニルオキシ、N,N-ジ-n-オクチルアミノカルボニルオキシ、N-n-オクチルカルバモイルオキシ基が好ましい。これらアシルオキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基が好ましく、例えばメトキシカルボニルオキシ、エトキシカルボニルオキシ、tert-ブトキシカルボニルオキシ、n-オクチルカルボニルオキシ基が好ましい。これらアルコキシカルボニルオキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
The aryloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 2,4-di-tert-amylphenoxy, 4-tert-butylphenoxy, 3 -Nitrophenoxy, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy group is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryloxy groups be divalent.
The silyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted silyloxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as trimethylsilyloxy or tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy group. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these silyloxy groups be divalent.
The heterocyclic oxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic oxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms. As the heterocycle, the heterocycle moiety is preferably the heterocycle moiety described above for the heterocycle group, and for example, 1-phenyltetrazol-5-oxy and 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these heterocyclic oxy groups be divalent.
The acyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms and a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, formyloxy, acetyloxy, pivaloyloxy, stearoyloxy , Benzoyloxy and p-methoxyphenylcarbonyloxy groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these acyloxy groups be divalent.
The carbamoyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy, N, N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbonyloxy, N, N-di- n-octylaminocarbonyloxy and Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these acyloxy groups be divalent.
The alkoxycarbonyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonyloxy, tert-butoxycarbonyloxy, and n-octylcarbonyloxy group. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkoxycarbonyloxy groups be divalent.
 アリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基は、炭素数7~30の置換または無置換のアリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基が好ましく、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルオキシ、p-メトキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ、p-n-ヘキサデシルオキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ基が好まし。これらアリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アミノ基は、アミノ基、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換または無置換のアリールアミノ基、炭素数0~30のヘテロ環アミノ基が好ましく、例えば、アミノ、メチルアミノ、ジメチルアミノ、アニリノ、N-メチル-アニリノ、ジフェニルアミノ、N-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イルアミノ基が好ましい。これらアミノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アシルアミノ基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルカルボニルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換または無置換のアリールカルボニルアミノ基が好ましく、例えば、ホルミルアミノ、アセチルアミノ、ピバロイルアミノ、ラウロイルアミノ、ベンゾイルアミノ、3,4,5-トリ-n-オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニルアミノ基が好ましい。これらアシルアミノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アミノカルボニルアミノ基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアミノカルボニルアミノ基が好ましく、例えば、カルバモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、N,N-ジエチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、モルホリノカルボニルアミノ基が好ましい。これらアミノカルボニルアミノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
The aryloxycarbonyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonyloxy group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonyloxy, p-methoxyphenoxycarbonyloxy, pn-hexadecyloxyphenoxycarbonyloxy group. Is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryloxycarbonyloxy groups be divalent.
The amino group is preferably an amino group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, For example, amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, N-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these amino groups be divalent.
The acylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino Benzoylamino, 3,4,5-tri-n-octyloxyphenylcarbonylamino group is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these acylamino groups be divalent.
The aminocarbonylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aminocarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, carbamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminocarbonylamino, N, N-diethylaminocarbonylamino, morpholinocarbonylamino group Is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aminocarbonylamino groups be divalent.
 アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基が好ましく、例えば、メトキシカルボニルアミノ、エトキシカルボニルアミノ、tert-ブトキシカルボニルアミノ、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニルアミノ、N-メチル-メトキシカルボニルアミノ基が好ましい。これらアルコキシカルボニルアミノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基は、炭素数7~30の置換または無置換のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基が好ましく、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ、p-クロロフェノキシカルボニルアミノ、m-n-オクチルオキシフェノキシカルボニルアミノ基が好ましい。これらアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 スルファモイルアミノ基は、炭素数0~30の置換または無置換のスルファモイルアミノ基が好ましく、例えば、スルファモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノスルホニルアミノ、N-n-オクチルアミノスルホニルアミノ基が好ましい。これらスルファモイルアミノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルスルホニルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換または無置換のアリールスルホニルアミノ基が好ましい。例えば、メチルスルホニルアミノ、ブチルスルホニルアミノ、フェニルスルホニルアミノ、2,3,5-トリクロロフェニルスルホニルアミノ、p-メチルフェニルスルホニルアミノ基が好ましい。これらアルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アルキルチオ基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルチオ基が好ましく、例えばメチルチオ、エチルチオ、n-ヘキサデシルチオ基が好ましい。これらアルキルチオ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
The alkoxycarbonylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, tert-butoxycarbonylamino, n-octadecyloxycarbonylamino, N-methyl- A methoxycarbonylamino group is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkoxycarbonylamino groups be divalent.
The aryloxycarbonylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonylamino, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino, and mn-octyloxyphenoxycarbonylamino group. preferable. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryloxycarbonylamino groups be divalent.
The sulfamoylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, such as sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, Nn-octylaminosulfonylamino. Groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these sulfamoylamino groups be divalent.
The alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms and a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, methylsulfonylamino, butylsulfonylamino, phenylsulfonylamino, 2,3,5-trichlorophenylsulfonylamino, and p-methylphenylsulfonylamino groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkyl or arylsulfonylamino groups be divalent.
The alkylthio group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylthio, ethylthio, or n-hexadecylthio group. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkylthio groups be divalent.
 アリールチオ基は、炭素数6~30の置換または無置換のアリールチオ基が好ましく、例えば、フェニルチオ、p-クロロフェニルチオ、m-メトキシフェニルチオ基が好ましい。これらアルキルチオ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 ヘテロ環チオ基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のヘテロ環チオ基が好ましく、ヘテロ環部は上述したヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましく、例えば、2-ベンゾチアゾリルチオ、1-フェニルテトラゾール-5-イルチオ基が好ましい。これらヘテロ環チオ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 スルファモイル基は、炭素数0~30の置換または無置換のスルファモイル基が好ましく、例えば、N-エチルスルファモイル、N-(3-ドデシルオキシプロピル)スルファモイル、N,N-ジメチルスルファモイル、N-アセチルスルファモイル、N-ベンゾイルスルファモイル、N-(N’-フェニルカルバモイル)スルファモイル基が好ましい。これらスルファモイル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルスルフィニル基、6~30の置換または無置換のアリールスルフィニル基が好ましく、例えば、メチルスルフィニル、エチルスルフィニル、フェニルスルフィニル、p-メチルフェニルスルフィニル基が好ましい。これらアルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルスルホニル基、6~30の置換または無置換のアリールスルホニル基が好ましく、例えば、メチルスルホニル、エチルスルホニル、フェニルスルホニル、p-メチルフェニルスルホニル基が好ましい。これらアルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
The arylthio group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenylthio, p-chlorophenylthio, and m-methoxyphenylthio groups. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkylthio groups be divalent.
The heterocyclic thio group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic thio group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and the heterocyclic moiety is preferably the heterocyclic moiety described above for the heterocyclic group, for example, 2-benzothiazolyl Ruthio and 1-phenyltetrazol-5-ylthio groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these heterocyclic thio groups be divalent.
The sulfamoyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, N-ethylsulfamoyl, N- (3-dodecyloxypropyl) sulfamoyl, N, N-dimethylsulfamoyl, N -Acetylsulfamoyl, N-benzoylsulfamoyl, N- (N′-phenylcarbamoyl) sulfamoyl groups are preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these sulfamoyl groups be divalent.
The alkyl or arylsulfinyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, p- A methylphenylsulfinyl group is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkyl or arylsulfinyl groups be divalent.
The alkyl or arylsulfonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, p- A methylphenylsulfonyl group is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkyl or arylsulfonyl groups be divalent.
 アシル基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のアルキルカルボニル基、炭素数7~30の置換または無置換のアリールカルボニル基が好ましく、例えば、アセチル、ピバロイル、2-クロロアセチル、ステアロイル、ベンゾイル、p-n-オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニル基が好ましい。これらアシル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アリールオキシカルボニル基は、炭素数7~30の置換または無置換のアリールオキシカルボニル基が好ましく、例えば、フェノキシカルボニル、o-クロロフェノキシカルボニル、m-ニトロフェノキシカルボニル、p-tert-ブチルフェノキシカルボニル基が好ましい。これらアリールオキシカルボニル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アルコキシカルボニル基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換アルコキシカルボニル基が好ましく、例えば、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル、tert-ブトキシカルボニル、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニルが好ましい。これらアルコキシカルボニル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 カルバモイル基は、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のカルバモイル、例えば、カルバモイル、N-メチルカルバモイル、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイル、N,N-ジ-n-オクチルカルバモイル、N-(メチルスルホニル)カルバモイル基が好ましい。これらカルバモイル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基は、炭素数6~30の置換または無置換のアリールアゾ基、炭素数3~30の置換または無置換のヘテロ環アゾ基(ヘテロ環部は上述したヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましい)が好ましい。例えば、フェニルアゾ、p-クロロフェニルアゾ、5-エチルチオ-1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2-イルアゾが好ましい。これらアリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
The acyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-chloroacetyl, stearoyl, benzoyl , Pn-octyloxyphenylcarbonyl group is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these acyl groups be divalent.
The aryloxycarbonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include phenoxycarbonyl, o-chlorophenoxycarbonyl, m-nitrophenoxycarbonyl, and p-tert-butylphenoxycarbonyl group. preferable. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryloxycarbonyl groups be divalent.
The alkoxycarbonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, and n-octadecyloxycarbonyl. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these alkoxycarbonyl groups be divalent.
The carbamoyl group is a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as carbamoyl, N-methylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N, N-di-n-octylcarbamoyl, N- (methylsulfonyl) A carbamoyl group is preferred. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these carbamoyl groups be divalent.
The aryl or heterocyclic azo group includes a substituted or unsubstituted arylazo group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic azo group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms (the heterocyclic portion is described in the above heterocyclic group). A heterocyclic portion is preferred. For example, phenylazo, p-chlorophenylazo, and 5-ethylthio-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylazo are preferable. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these aryl or heterocyclic azo groups be divalent.
 イミド基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のイミド基が好ましく、例えばN-スクシンイミド、N-フタルイミド基が好ましい。これらイミド基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 ホスフィノ基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のホスフィノ基が好ましく、例えば、ジメチルホスフィノ、ジフェニルホスフィノ、メチルフェノキシホスフィノ基が好ましい。これらホスフィノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 ホスフィニル基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のホスフィニル基が好ましく、例えば、ホスフィニル、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニル、ジエトキシホスフィニル基が好ましい。これらホスフィニル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 ホスフィニルオキシ基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のホスフィニルオキシ基が好ましく、例えば、ジフェノキシホスフィニルオキシ、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニルオキシ基が好ましい。これらホスフィニルオキシ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 ホスフィニルアミノ基は、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のホスフィニルアミノ基が好ましく、例えば、ジメトキシホスフィニルアミノ、ジメチルアミノホスフィニルアミノ基が好ましい。これらホスフィニルアミノ基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
 シリル基は、好ましくは、炭素数3~30の置換または無置換のシリル基が好ましく、例えば、トリメチルシリル、tert-ブチルジメチルシリル、フェニルジメチルシリル基が挙げられる。これらシリル基を2価にするためにX1はどの位置に導入しても良い。
The imide group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted imide group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as N-succinimide and N-phthalimide groups. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these imide groups be divalent.
The phosphino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, for example, a dimethylphosphino, diphenylphosphino, or methylphenoxyphosphino group. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these phosphino groups be divalent.
The phosphinyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phosphinyl, dioctyloxyphosphinyl, and diethoxyphosphinyl groups. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these phosphinyl groups be divalent.
The phosphinyloxy group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as diphenoxyphosphinyloxy and dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy groups. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these phosphinyloxy groups be divalent.
The phosphinylamino group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as a dimethoxyphosphinylamino or dimethylaminophosphinylamino group. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these phosphinylamino groups be divalent.
The silyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted silyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, and phenyldimethylsilyl groups. X 1 may be introduced at any position in order to make these silyl groups be divalent.
 また、Lが2価の連結基を表す場合、-NR10-、-O-、-SO2-、フッ素置換アルキレン基、フッ素置換フェニレン基またはこれらの組み合わせからなる基を表すことが好ましい。特に、-NR10-と-SO2とフッ素置換アルキレン基との組み合わせからなる基、-O-とフッ素置換フェニレン基との組み合わせからなる基、または、-NR10-と-SO2とフッ素置換アルキレン基との組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。
 -NR10-において、R10は、水素原子または炭素数1~5のアルキル基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。
 フッ素置換アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。これらのアルキレン基は、パーフルオロアルキレン基がより好ましい。フッ素置換アルキレン基の具体例としては、ジフルオロメチレン基、テトラフルオロエチレン基、ヘキサフルオロプロピレン基などが挙げられる。
 フッ素置換フェニレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。フッ素置換フェニレン基の具体例としては、テトラフルオロフェニレン基、ヘキサフルオロ-1-ナフチレン基、ヘキサフルオロ-2-ナフチレン基などが挙げられる。
When L represents a divalent linking group, it preferably represents a group consisting of —NR 10 —, —O—, —SO 2 —, a fluorine-substituted alkylene group, a fluorine-substituted phenylene group, or a combination thereof. In particular, a group consisting of a combination of —NR 10 —, —SO 2 and a fluorine-substituted alkylene group, a group consisting of a combination of —O— and a fluorine-substituted phenylene group, or —NR 10 —, —SO 2 and a fluorine substitution A group consisting of a combination with an alkylene group is preferred.
In —NR 10 —, R 10 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom.
The fluorine-substituted alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. These alkylene groups are more preferably perfluoroalkylene groups. Specific examples of the fluorine-substituted alkylene group include a difluoromethylene group, a tetrafluoroethylene group, and a hexafluoropropylene group.
The number of carbon atoms of the fluorine-substituted phenylene group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and still more preferably 6 to 10. Specific examples of the fluorine-substituted phenylene group include a tetrafluorophenylene group, a hexafluoro-1-naphthylene group, and a hexafluoro-2-naphthylene group.
 一般式(P)中、X1は、対アニオンであり、-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、一般式(A1)で表される構造を含む基および一般式(A2)で表される構造を含む基から選択される少なくとも1種から選択されることが好ましい。ここで、一般式(A1)で表される構造および一般式(A2)で表される構造は、上述した第1の実施の形態で説明したものと同義である。
 一般式(A1)で表される構造を含む基は、上述した一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2の一方の末端に、フッ素置換アルキル基を有することが好ましく、R1およびR2の一方が直接フッ素置換アルキル基と結合していることがより好ましい。フッ素置換アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましく、1または2がよりさらに好ましく、1が特に好ましい。これらのアルキル基は、パーフルオロアルキル基がより好ましい。フッ素置換アルキル基の具体例としては、トリフルオロメチル基が好ましい。
 一般式(A2)で表される構造を含む基は、上述した一般式(A2)中、R3~R5の少なくともいずれかの末端に、フッ素置換アルキル基を有することが好ましく、R3~R5の少なくとも2つが直接フッ素置換アルキル基と結合していることがより好ましい。特に、R3~R5の少なくとも2つの末端に、フッ素置換アルキル基を有することが好ましく、R3~R5の少なくとも2つが直接フッ素置換アルキル基とけ統合していることがより好ましい。フッ素置換アルキル基は、一般式(A1)で表される構造を含む基で説明したものと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 その他、X1の具体例としては、上述した対アニオンAが挙げられる。この場合、対アニオンAを構成するいずれか1つの水素原子またはハロゲン原子が一般式(P)中のLと結合している。
In the general formula (P), X 1 is a counter anion, —SO 3 , —COO , —PO 4 , a group containing a structure represented by the general formula (A1) and the general formula (A2) It is preferably selected from at least one selected from groups containing the structure represented. Here, the structure represented by the general formula (A1) and the structure represented by the general formula (A2) are synonymous with those described in the first embodiment.
The group including the structure represented by the general formula (A1) preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group at one terminal of R 1 and R 2 in the general formula (A1) described above, and R 1 and R 2 More preferably, one of these is directly bonded to a fluorine-substituted alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms in the fluorine-substituted alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, still more preferably 1 to 3, still more preferably 1 or 2, and particularly preferably 1. These alkyl groups are more preferably perfluoroalkyl groups. As a specific example of the fluorine-substituted alkyl group, a trifluoromethyl group is preferable.
Group containing a structure represented by the general formula (A2), in the above-mentioned general formula (A2), at least either end of R 3 ~ R 5, preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group, R 3 ~ More preferably, at least two of R 5 are directly bonded to a fluorine-substituted alkyl group. In particular, at least two ends of R 3 ~ R 5, preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group, and more preferably at least two of R 3 ~ R 5 are melted directly fluorine-substituted alkyl group integration. A fluorine-substituted alkyl group is synonymous with what was demonstrated by group containing the structure represented by general formula (A1), and its preferable range is also the same.
Other specific examples of X 1 include the counter anion A described above. In this case, any one hydrogen atom or halogen atom constituting the counter anion A is bonded to L in the general formula (P).
 架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造は、一般式(TP1A)および(TP2A)中、Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかに架橋性基を有し、かつ、この架橋性基を有するRtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかがさらに一般式(P)で置換されていてもよい。
 また、一般式(TP1A)および(TP2A)中、一般式(P)で置換されている部分は1箇所だけ存在していてもよいし、2箇所以上存在していてもよい。一般式(P)で置換されている部分が2箇所以上存在している場合、着色剤中には、トリアリールメタン構造に含まれるカチオン以外に、対アニオンの数に対応する数のカチオンが存在する。
The triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation has a crosslinkable group in any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 in the general formulas (TP1A) and (TP2A), In addition, any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 having this crosslinkable group may be further substituted with the general formula (P).
Moreover, in general formula (TP1A) and (TP2A), the part substituted by general formula (P) may exist only in one place, and may exist in two or more places. When there are two or more moieties substituted with the general formula (P), there are a number of cations corresponding to the number of counter anions in addition to the cations contained in the triarylmethane structure in the colorant. To do.
 以下に、本発明に用いられる第2の実施の形態の着色剤の具体例を示すが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, specific examples of the colorant of the second embodiment used in the present invention will be shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 本発明に用いられるトリアリールメタン染料は、1種単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて含有することができる。
 上記トリアリールメタン染料の含有量は、本発明の着色組成物の全固形分に対して、10~60質量%が好ましく、10~40質量%がより好ましい。
The triarylmethane dye used in the present invention can be contained singly or in combination of two or more.
The content of the triarylmethane dye is preferably 10 to 60% by mass, and more preferably 10 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention.
<<他の着色化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、上述した着色剤、すなわち、トリアリールメタン染料以外の他の着色化合物を1種または2種以上含んでいてもよい。他の着色化合物としては、染料化合物、顔料化合物およびそれらの分散物が挙げられる。
<< Other colored compounds >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain one or more coloring compounds other than the above-described coloring agent, that is, a triarylmethane dye. Examples of other coloring compounds include dye compounds, pigment compounds, and dispersions thereof.
 染料化合物としては、着色画像の色相に影響を与えないものであればどのような構造であってもよく、例えば、アゾ系(例えば、ソルベントイエロー162)、アントラキノン系(例えば、特開2001-10881号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物)、フタロシアニン系(例えば、米国特許2008/0076044A1に記載のフタロシアニン化合物)、キサンテン系(例えば、シー・アイ・アシッド・レッド289(C.I.Acid.Red 289))、トリアリールメタン系(例えば、シー・アイ・アシッドブルー7(C.I.Acid Blue7)、シー・アイ・アシッドブルー83(C.I.Acid Blue83)、シー・アイ・アシッドブルー90(C.I.Acid Blue90)、シー・アイ・ソルベント・ブルー38(C.I.Solvent Blue38)、シー・アイ・アシッド・バイオレット17(C.I.Acid Violet17)、シー・アイ・アシッド・バイオレット49(C.I.Acid Violet49)、シー・アイ・アシッド・グリーン3(C.I.Acid Green3)、メチン染料、などが挙げられる。 The dye compound may have any structure as long as it does not affect the hue of the colored image. For example, azo (for example, Solvent Yellow 162), anthraquinone (for example, JP-A-2001-10881). Anthraquinone compounds), phthalocyanine compounds (for example, phthalocyanine compounds described in US 2008 / 0076044A1), xanthene compounds (for example, CI Acid Red 289)) , Triarylmethane series (for example, C.I. Acid Blue 7), C.I. Acid Blue 83 (C.I. Acid Blue 83), C.I. Acid Blue 90 (C.I. Acid Blue 7). I. Acid Blue 90), C.I. Blue 38 (CI Solvent Blue 38), CI Acid Violet 17 (CI Acid Violet 17), CI Acid Violet 49 (CI Acid Violet 49), Sea Eye -Acid green 3 (CI Acid Green3), a methine dye, etc. are mentioned.
 顔料化合物としては、ペリレン、ペリノン、キナクリドン、キナクリドンキノン、アントラキノン、アントアントロン、ベンズイミダゾロン、ジスアゾ縮合、ジスアゾ、アゾ、インダントロン、フタロシアニン、トリアリールカルボニウム、ジオキサジン、アミノアントラキノン、ジケトピロロピロール、インジゴ、チオインジゴ、イソインドリン、イソインドリノン、ピラントロンもしくはイソビオラントロン等が挙げられる。さらに詳しくは、例えば、ピグメント・レッド190、ピグメント・レッド224、ピグメント・バイオレット29等のペリレン化合物顔料、ピグメント・オレンジ43、もしくはピグメント・レッド194等のペリノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・バイオレット19、ピグメント・バイオレット42、ピグメント・レッド122、ピグメント・レッド192、ピグメント・レッド202、ピグメント・レッド207、もしくはピグメント・レッド209のキナクリドン化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド206、ピグメント・オレンジ48、もしくはピグメント・オレンジ49等のキナクリドンキノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー147等のアントラキノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド168等のアントアントロン化合物顔料、ピグメント・ブラウン25、ピグメント・バイオレット32、ピグメント・オレンジ36、ピグメント・イエロー120、ピグメント・イエロー180、ピグメント・イエロー181、ピグメント・オレンジ62、もしくはピグメント・レッド185等のベンズイミダゾロン化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー93、ピグメント・イエロー94、ピグメント・イエロー95、ピグメント・イエロー128、ピグメント・イエロー166、ピグメント・オレンジ34、ピグメント・オレンジ13、ピグメント・オレンジ31、ピグメント・レッド144、ピグメント・レッド166、ピグメント・レッド220、ピグメント・レッド221、ピグメント・レッド242、ピグメント・レッド248、ピグメント・レッド262、もしくはピグメント・ブラウン23等のジスアゾ縮合化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー13、ピグメント・イエロー83、もしくはピグメント・イエロー188等のジスアゾ化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド187、ピグメント・レッド170、ピグメント・イエロー74、ピグメント・イエロー150、ピグメント・レッド48、ピグメント・レッド53、ピグメント・オレンジ64、もしくはピグメント・レッド247等のアゾ化合物顔料、ピグメント・ブルー60等のインダントロン化合物顔料、ピグメント・グリーン7、ピグメント・グリーン36、ピグメント・グリーン37、ピグメント・グリーン58、ピグメント・ブルー16、ピグメント・ブルー75、もしくはピグメント・ブルー15等のフタロシアニン化合物顔料、ピグメント・ブルー56、もしくはピグメント・ブルー61等のトリアリールカルボニウム化合物顔料、ピグメント・バイオレット23、もしくはピグメント・バイオレット37等のジオキサジン化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド177等のアミノアントラキノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド254、ピグメント・レッド255、ピグメント・レッド264、ピグメント・レッド272、ピグメント・オレンジ71、もしくはピグメント・オレンジ73等のジケトピロロピロール化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド88等のチオインジゴ化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー139、ピグメント・オレンジ66等のイソインドリン化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー109、もしくはピグメント・オレンジ61等のイソインドリノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・オレンジ40、もしくはピグメント・レッド216等のピラントロン化合物顔料、またはピグメント・バイオレット31等のイソビオラントロン化合物顔料が挙げられる。
 本発明では緑からシアン色の色材が好ましく、ピグメント・グリーン7、ピグメント・グリーン36、ピグメント・グリーン37、ピグメント・グリーン58、ピグメント・ブルー16、ピグメント・ブルー75、もしくはピグメント・ブルー15等のフタロシアニン化合物顔料、ピグメント・ブルー56、もしくはピグメント・ブルー61等のトリアリールカルボニウム化合物顔料、ピグメント・バイオレット23、もしくはピグメント・バイオレット37等のジオキサジン化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド177等のアミノアントラキノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド254、ピグメント・レッド255、ピグメント・レッド264、ピグメント・レッド272、ピグメント・オレンジ71、もしくはピグメント・オレンジ73等のジケトピロロピロール化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド88等のチオインジゴ化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー139、ピグメント・オレンジ66等のイソインドリン化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー109、もしくはピグメント・オレンジ61等のイソインドリノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・オレンジ40、もしくはピグメント・レッド216等のピラントロン化合物顔料、またはピグメント・バイオレット31等のイソビオラントロン化合物顔料が好ましい。
Examples of pigment compounds include perylene, perinone, quinacridone, quinacridonequinone, anthraquinone, anthanthrone, benzimidazolone, disazo condensation, disazo, azo, indanthrone, phthalocyanine, triarylcarbonium, dioxazine, aminoanthraquinone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, Indigo, thioindigo, isoindoline, isoindolinone, pyranthrone, isoviolanthrone and the like. More specifically, for example, perylene compound pigments such as Pigment Red 190, Pigment Red 224, and Pigment Violet 29, perinone compound pigments such as Pigment Orange 43, and Pigment Red 194, Pigment Violet 19, and Pigment Violet. 42, quinacridone such as Pigment Red 122, Pigment Red 192, Pigment Red 202, Pigment Red 207, or Pigment Red 209, quinacridone compound pigment, Pigment Red 206, Pigment Orange 48, or Pigment Orange 49 Quinone compound pigment, anthraquinone compound pigment such as pigment yellow 147, anthanthrone compound pigment such as pigment red 168, pigment Benzimidazolone compound pigments such as Pigment Brown 25, Pigment Violet 32, Pigment Orange 36, Pigment Yellow 120, Pigment Yellow 180, Pigment Yellow 181, Pigment Orange 62, or Pigment Red 185; Yellow 93, Pigment Yellow 94, Pigment Yellow 95, Pigment Yellow 128, Pigment Yellow 166, Pigment Orange 34, Pigment Orange 13, Pigment Orange 31, Pigment Red 144, Pigment Red 166, Pigment Red Red 220, Pigment Red 221, Pigment Red 242, Pigment Red 248, Pigment Red 262, or Pigment Disazo condensation compound pigments such as Brown 23, Pigment Yellow 13, Pigment Yellow 83, or Disazo Compound Pigments such as Pigment Yellow 188, Pigment Red 187, Pigment Red 170, Pigment Yellow 74, Pigment Yellow 150, Pigment Red 48, Pigment Red 53, Pigment Orange 64, Pigment Red 247 and other azo compound pigments, Pigment Blue 60 and other indanthrone compound pigments, Pigment Green 7, Pigment Green 36, Pigment Green 37, phthalocyanine compound pigments such as Pigment Green 58, Pigment Blue 16, Pigment Blue 75, and Pigment Blue 15, Pigment Blue 56 Or triarylcarbonium compound pigments such as Pigment Blue 61, dioxazine compound pigments such as Pigment Violet 23 or Pigment Violet 37, aminoanthraquinone compound pigments such as Pigment Red 177, Pigment Red 254, Pigment Red 255, pigment red 264, pigment red 272, pigment orange 71, or diketopyrrolopyrrole compound pigment such as pigment orange 73, thioindigo compound pigment such as pigment red 88, pigment yellow 139, pigment orange 66 Isoindoline compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 109, Pigment Orange 61, and Pigment Oren 40, or pyranthrone compound pigments such as Pigment Red 216 or isoviolanthrone compound pigments, such as Pigment Violet 31, and the like.
In the present invention, a color material of green to cyan is preferable, such as Pigment Green 7, Pigment Green 36, Pigment Green 37, Pigment Green 58, Pigment Blue 16, Pigment Blue 75, or Pigment Blue 15. Phthalocyanine compound pigments, triarylcarbonium compound pigments such as pigment blue 56 or pigment blue 61, dioxazine compound pigments such as pigment violet 23 or pigment violet 37, aminoanthraquinone compound pigments such as pigment red 177, Pigment Red 254, Pigment Red 255, Pigment Red 264, Pigment Red 272, Pigment Orange 71, Pigment Orange 73, etc. Ketopyrrolopyrrole compound pigments, thioindigo compound pigments such as Pigment Red 88, isoindolin compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 139 and Pigment Orange 66, isoindolinone compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 109 or Pigment Orange 61, Pyranthrone compound pigments such as CI Pigment Orange 40 or CI Pigment Red 216, or isoviolanthrone compound pigments such as CI Pigment Violet 31 are preferred.
 上記染料または顔料を分散物として配合する場合、特開平9-197118号公報、特開2000-239544号公報の記載に従って調整することができる。
 上記料または顔料の含有量は、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で使用でき、本発明の着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.5質量%~70質量%であることが好ましい。また、吸収強度比(450nmの吸収/650nmの吸収)が、0.95~1.05の範囲となるように、着色組成物に添加されることが好ましい。
When the dye or pigment is blended as a dispersion, it can be adjusted according to the descriptions in JP-A-9-197118 and JP-A-2000-239544.
The content of the above-mentioned material or pigment can be used as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and is preferably 0.5% by mass to 70% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention. Further, it is preferably added to the coloring composition so that the absorption intensity ratio (absorption at 450 nm / absorption at 650 nm) is in the range of 0.95 to 1.05.
<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を含有する。重合性化合物としては、例えば、少なくとも1個のエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する付加重合性化合物を挙げることができる。
<< polymerizable compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound. Examples of the polymerizable compound include addition polymerizable compounds having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
 具体的には、末端エチレン性不飽和結合を少なくとも1個、好ましくは2個以上有する化合物から選ばれる。このような化合物群は、上記産業分野において広く知られているものであり、本発明においてはこれらを特に限定なく用いることができる。これらは、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、すなわち2量体、3量体およびオリゴマー、またはそれらの混合物並びにそれらの(共)重合体などの化学的形態のいずれであってもよい。 Specifically, it is selected from compounds having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond, preferably two or more. Such a compound group is widely known in the industrial field, and these can be used without any particular limitation in the present invention. These may be in any chemical form such as, for example, monomers, prepolymers, i.e. dimers, trimers and oligomers, or mixtures thereof and their (co) polymers.
 モノマーおよびその(共)重合体の例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など)やそのエステル類、アミド類、並びにこれらの(共)重合体が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、および不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アミン化合物とのアミド類、並びにこれらの(共)重合体である。また、ヒドロキシ基やアミノ基、メルカプト基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類或いはエポキシ類との付加反応物や、単官能若しくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基やエポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との付加反応物、さらに、ハロゲン基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との置換反応物も好適である。また、別の例として、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン、ビニルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。 Examples of monomers and their (co) polymers include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), their esters, amides, and these (Co) polymers, preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and these (co) polymers It is a polymer. In addition, addition reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies with unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as hydroxy group, amino group, mercapto group, monofunctional or polyfunctional. A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. In addition, an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine, or thiol, and a halogen group A substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable. As another example, it is also possible to use a group of compounds substituted with unsaturated phosphonic acid, styrene, vinyl ether or the like instead of the unsaturated carboxylic acid.
 脂肪族多価アルコール化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルのモノマーの具体例としては、アクリル酸エステルとして、例えば、エチレングリコールジアクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジアクリレート、1,3-ブタンジオールジアクリレート、テトラメチレングリコールジアクリレート、プロピレングリコールジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリメチロールエタントリアクリレート、ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート、1,4-シクロヘキサンジオールジアクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールジアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールジアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、ソルビトールトリアクリレート、ソルビトールテトラアクリレート、ソルビトールペンタアクリレート、ソルビトールヘキサアクリレート、トリ(アクリロイルオキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、ポリエステルアクリレートオリゴマー、イソシアヌール酸EO変性トリアクリレート等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of an ester monomer of an aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid include acrylic acid esters such as ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, tetra Methylene glycol diacrylate, propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, trimethylolethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol Diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate Chryrate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, sorbitol triacrylate, sorbitol tetraacrylate, sorbitol pentaacrylate, sorbitol hexaacrylate, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, polyester acrylate oligomer, isocyanur Examples include acid EO-modified triacrylate.
 また、メタクリル酸エステルとして、例えば、テトラメチレングリコールジメタクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジメタクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリメタクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリメタクリレート、エチレングリコールジメタクリレート、1,3-ブタンジオールジメタクリレート、ヘキサンジオールジメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールジメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールジメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート、ソルビトールトリメタクリレート、ソルビトールテトラメタクリレート、ビス〔p-(3-メタクリルオキシ-2-ヒドロキシプロポキシ)フェニル〕ジメチルメタン、ビス-〔p-(メタクリルオキシエトキシ)フェニル〕ジメチルメタン等が挙げられる。 Examples of methacrylic acid esters include tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, trimethylolethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, and 1,3-butanediol. Dimethacrylate, hexanediol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol dimethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, sorbitol trimethacrylate, sorbitol tetramethacrylate, bis [p- (3- Methacryloxy-2- Mud propoxy) phenyl] dimethyl methane, bis - [p- (methacryloxyethoxy) phenyl] dimethyl methane, and the like.
 さらに、イタコン酸エステルとして、例えば、エチレングリコールジイタコネート、プロピレングリコールジイタコネート、1,3-ブタンジオールジイタコネート、1,4-ブタンジオールジイタコネート、テトラメチレングリコールジイタコネート、ペンタエリスリトールジイタコネート、ソルビトールテトライタコネート等が、また、クロトン酸エステルとして、例えば、エチレングリコールジクロトネート、テトラメチレングリコールジクロトネート、ペンタエリスリトールジクロトネート、ソルビトールテトラジクロトネート等が、イソクロトン酸エステルとして、例えば、エチレングリコールジイソクロトネート、ペンタエリスリトールジイソクロトネート、ソルビトールテトライソクロトネート等が、また、マレイン酸エステルとして、例えば、エチレングリコールジマレート、トリエチレングリコールジマレート、ペンタエリスリトールジマレート、ソルビトールテトラマレート等が挙げられる。 Further, as itaconic acid esters, for example, ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, tetramethylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol Diitaconate, sorbitol tetritaconate, etc., and crotonic acid esters such as ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate, sorbitol tetradicrotonate, etc. For example, ethylene glycol diisocrotonate, pentaerythritol diisocrotonate, sorbitol tetraisocrotonate, etc. As Le, for example, ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate, sorbitol tetra malate, and the like.
 その他のエステルの例として、例えば、特公昭51-47334号公報、特開昭57-196231号公報記載の脂肪族アルコール系エステル類や、特開昭59-5240号公報、特開昭59-5241号公報、特開平2-226149号公報記載の芳香族系骨格を有するもの、特開平1-165613号公報記載のアミノ基を含有するもの等も好適に用いられる。さらに、前述のエステルモノマーは混合物としても使用することができる。 Examples of other esters include, for example, aliphatic alcohol esters described in JP-B-51-47334 and JP-A-57-196231, JP-A-59-5240, and JP-A-59-5241. And those having an aromatic skeleton described in JP-A-2-226149 and those containing an amino group described in JP-A-1-165613 are preferably used. Furthermore, the ester monomers described above can also be used as a mixture.
 また、イソシアネートと水酸基の付加反応を用いて製造されるウレタン系付加重合性化合物も好適であり、そのような具体例としては、例えば、特公昭48-41708号公報中に記載の、1分子に2個以上のイソシアネート基を有するポリイソシアネート化合物に、下記一般式(A)で表される水酸基を含有するビニルモノマーを付加させた1分子中に2個以上の重合性ビニル基を含有するビニルウレタン化合物等が挙げられる。
  CH2=C(R)COOCH2CH(R’)OH  ・・・(A)
〔一般式(A)中、RおよびR’は、それぞれ独立にHまたはCH3を表す。〕
Also suitable are urethane-based addition-polymerizable compounds produced by the addition reaction of isocyanate and hydroxyl group. Specific examples thereof include, for example, one molecule described in JP-B-48-41708. Vinyl urethane containing two or more polymerizable vinyl groups in one molecule obtained by adding a vinyl monomer containing a hydroxyl group represented by the following general formula (A) to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups Compounds and the like.
CH 2 = C (R) COOCH 2 CH (R ′) OH (A)
[In General Formula (A), R and R ′ each independently represent H or CH 3 . ]
 また、重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬株式会社製)ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬株式会社製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介している構造も好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。 Further, as the polymerizable compound, dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-320; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Company-made) dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. And a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are interposed via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues. These oligomer types can also be used.
 これらの重合性化合物について、その構造や、単独使用か併用か、添加量等の使用方法の詳細は、着色組成物の最終的な性能設計にあわせて任意に設定できる。例えば、感度の観点では、1分子あたりの不飽和基含量が多い構造が好ましく、多くの場合は2官能以上が好ましい。また、着色硬化膜の強度を高める観点では、3官能以上のものがよく、さらに、異なる官能数・異なる重合性基(例えばアクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステル、スチレン化合物、ビニルエーテル化合物)のものを併用することで、感度と強度の両方を調節する方法も有効である。また、着色組成物に含有される他の成分(例えば、光重合開始剤、着色剤(顔料)、バインダーポリマー等)との相溶性、分散性に対しても、重合性化合物の選択・使用法は重要な要因であり、例えば、低純度化合物の使用や2種以上の併用により相溶性を向上させうることがある。また、基板などの硬質表面との密着性を向上させる観点で特定の構造を選択することもあり得る。 About these polymerizable compounds, the structure, details of usage such as single use or combination, addition amount and the like can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of the coloring composition. For example, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable. Also, from the viewpoint of increasing the strength of the colored cured film, those having three or more functionalities are preferable, and those having different functional numbers and different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic acid ester, methacrylic acid ester, styrene compound, vinyl ether compound) are used in combination. Thus, a method of adjusting both sensitivity and intensity is also effective. In addition, selection and use of polymerizable compounds for compatibility and dispersibility with other components (for example, photopolymerization initiator, colorant (pigment), binder polymer, etc.) contained in the colored composition Is an important factor. For example, compatibility may be improved by the use of a low-purity compound or a combination of two or more. In addition, a specific structure may be selected from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a substrate.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物の含有量は、本発明の効果をより効果的に得る観点から、10~80質量%が好ましく、15~75質量%がより好ましく、20~60質量%が特に好ましい。
 本発明の組成物は、重合性化合物を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 15 to 75% by mass, and more preferably 20 to 60% from the viewpoint of more effectively obtaining the effects of the present invention. Mass% is particularly preferred.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound or two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、少なくとも一種の光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。光重合開始剤は、重合性化合物を重合させ得るものであれば、特に制限はなく、特性、開始効率、吸収波長、入手性、コスト等の観点で選ばれるのが好ましい。
<< photopolymerization initiator >>
The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can polymerize a polymerizable compound, and is preferably selected from the viewpoints of characteristics, initiation efficiency, absorption wavelength, availability, cost, and the like.
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物およびハロメチル-s-トリアジン化合物から選択される少なくとも1つの活性ハロゲン化合物、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物、ロフィン2量体、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物およびその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体およびその塩、オキシム化合物、等が挙げられる。光重合開始剤の具体例については、特開2004-295116号公報の段落〔0070〕~〔0077〕に記載のものが挙げられる。中でも、重合反応が迅速である点等から、オキシム化合物またはビイミダゾール系化合物が好ましい。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include at least one active halogen compound selected from halomethyloxadiazole compounds and halomethyl-s-triazine compounds, 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, lophine dimers, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds And derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, oxime compounds, and the like. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator include those described in paragraphs [0070] to [0077] of JP-A No. 2004-295116. Among these, an oxime compound or a biimidazole compound is preferable from the viewpoint of rapid polymerization reaction.
 オキシム系化合物(以下、「オキシム系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)としては、特に限定はなく、例えば、特開2000-80068号公報、WO02/100903A1、特開2001-233842号公報等に記載のオキシム系化合物が挙げられる。
 オキシム系化合物の具体的な例としては、特開2013-182215号公報の段落0053の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
The oxime compound (hereinafter also referred to as “oxime photopolymerization initiator”) is not particularly limited, and is described in, for example, JP-A No. 2000-80068, WO 02 / 100903A1, and JP-A No. 2001-233842. These oxime compounds are mentioned.
As specific examples of the oxime compound, the description in paragraph 0053 of JP2013-182215A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 また、本発明においては、感度、径時安定性、後加熱時の着色の観点から、オキシム化合物として、下記一般式(1)または一般式(2)で表される化合物がより好ましい。 In the present invention, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, time stability, and coloring during post-heating, the oxime compound is more preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
(一般式(1)中、RおよびXは、それぞれ、1価の置換基を表し、Aは、2価の有機基を表し、Arは、アリール基を表す。nは、1~5の整数である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
(In the general formula (1), R and X each represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, Ar represents an aryl group, and n represents an integer of 1 to 5. .)
 Rとしては、高感度化の点から、アシル基が好ましく、具体的には、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ベンゾイル基、トルイル基が好ましい。 R is preferably an acyl group from the viewpoint of high sensitivity, and specifically, an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a benzoyl group, and a toluyl group are preferable.
 Aとしては、感度を高め、加熱経時による着色を抑制する点から、無置換のアルキレン基、アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、tert-ブチル基、ドデシル基)で置換されたアルキレン基、アルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、アリル基)で置換されたアルキレン基、アリール基(例えば、フェニル基、p-トリル基、キシリル基、クメニル基、ナフチル基、アンスリル基、フェナントリル基、スチリル基)で置換されたアルキレン基が好ましい。 A is an unsubstituted alkylene group, an alkylene group substituted with an alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a tert-butyl group, or a dodecyl group) from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloration due to heating, An alkylene group substituted with an alkenyl group (for example, vinyl group, allyl group), aryl group (for example, phenyl group, p-tolyl group, xylyl group, cumenyl group, naphthyl group, anthryl group, phenanthryl group, styryl group) A substituted alkylene group is preferred.
 Arとしては、感度を高め、加熱経時による着色を抑制する点から、置換または無置換のフェニル基が好ましい。置換フェニル基の場合、その置換基としては、例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等のハロゲン基が好ましい。 Ar is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloring due to heating. In the case of a substituted phenyl group, the substituent is preferably a halogen group such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom.
 Xとしては、溶剤溶解性と長波長領域の吸収効率向上の点から、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいアルケニル基、置換基を有してもよいアルキニル基、置換基を有してもよいアルコキシ基、置換基を有してもよいアリールオキシ基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルチオキシ基、置換基を有してもよいアリールチオキシ基、置換基を有してもよいアミノ基が好ましい。また、一般式(1)におけるnは1~2の整数が好ましい。 X is an alkyl group that may have a substituent, an aryl group that may have a substituent, or an alkenyl that may have a substituent from the viewpoint of improving solvent solubility and absorption efficiency in the long wavelength region. Group, an alkynyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylthioxy group which may have a substituent, a substituent An arylthioxy group which may have an amino group and an amino group which may have a substituent are preferable. In the general formula (1), n is preferably an integer of 1 to 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 一般式(2)中、R101はアルキル基、アルカノイル基、アルケノイル基、アリーロイル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリーロキシカルボニル基、ヘテロ環オキシカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基、アルキルチオカルボニル基、アリールチオカルボニル基、ヘテロ環チオカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールチオカルボニル基またはCO-CO-Rfを表す。Rfは炭素環式芳香族基またはヘテロ環式芳香族基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
In the general formula (2), R 101 represents an alkyl group, an alkanoyl group, an alkenoyl group, an aryloyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a heteroaryloxycarbonyl group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, an arylthiocarbonyl. Represents a group, a heterocyclic thiocarbonyl group, a heteroarylthiocarbonyl group or CO—CO—Rf. Rf represents a carbocyclic aromatic group or a heterocyclic aromatic group.
 R102はアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を示し、これらは置換されていても良い。
 R103およびR104は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を示し、これらの基は、さらにハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アルキルカルボニル基等で置換されていても良い。
R102 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, which may be substituted.
R 103 and R 104 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and these groups are further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyl group or the like. Also good.
 R105~R111は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アルコキシ基、アリーロイル基、ヘテロアリーロイル基、アルキルチオ基、アリーロイルチオ基、ヘテロアリーロイル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アリールカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリーロキシカルボニル基、ヘテロ環オキシカルボニル基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、スルホン酸基、ヒドロキシ基、カルボン酸基、アミド基、カルバモイル基またはシアノ基を表す。
 R105~R111のうちの、一つまたは二つが電子吸引性の置換基、即ち、ニトロ基、シアノ基、ハロゲン基、アルキルカルボニル基またはアリールカルボニル基であることが、一段と高い硬化性を有する着色組成物が得られるので、好ましい。
R 105 to R 111 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloyl group, a heteroaryloyl group, an alkylthio group, an aryloylthio group, or a heteroaryloyl group. , Alkylcarbonyl group, arylcarbonyl group, heteroarylcarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, nitro group, amino group, sulfonic acid group, hydroxy group, carboxylic acid group, amide group, carbamoyl Represents a group or a cyano group.
One or two of R 105 to R 111 are electron-withdrawing substituents, that is, a nitro group, a cyano group, a halogen group, an alkylcarbonyl group or an arylcarbonyl group, which has a much higher curability. Since a coloring composition is obtained, it is preferable.
 上記一般式(2)で表されるフルオレン構造を有する化合物の具体例を以下に挙げる。ただし、これの化合物に限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the compound having a fluorene structure represented by the general formula (2) are given below. However, it is not limited to these compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 上記一般式(2)で表されるフルオレン構造を有する化合物は、例えば国際公開WO2014/050738号パンフレットに記載された合成方法に準じて合成することができる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
The compound having a fluorene structure represented by the general formula (2) can be synthesized according to the synthesis method described in, for example, International Publication WO 2014/05050738 Pamphlet.
 ビイミダゾール系化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-182213号公報段落0061~0070の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As specific examples of the biimidazole compound, the description in paragraphs 0061 to 0070 of JP2013-182213A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 また、本発明の着色組成物には、上記の光重合開始剤のほかに、特開2004-295116号公報の段落番号0079に記載の他の公知の光重合開始剤を使用してもよい。 In addition to the above photopolymerization initiator, other known photopolymerization initiators described in paragraph No. 0079 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 may be used for the colored composition of the present invention.
 光重合開始剤の着色組成物の全固形分中における含有量は、本発明の効果をより効果的に得る観点から、3質量%~20質量%が好ましく、4質量%~19質量%がより好ましく、5質量%~18質量%が特に好ましい。
 本発明の組成物は、光重合開始剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the colored composition is preferably 3% by mass to 20% by mass and more preferably 4% by mass to 19% by mass from the viewpoint of obtaining the effect of the present invention more effectively. 5 mass% to 18 mass% is particularly preferable.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<有機溶剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、少なくとも一種の有機溶剤を含有することが好ましいい。
 有機溶剤は、並存する各成分の溶解性や着色組成物としたときの塗布性を満足できるものであれば、基本的には特に制限はなく、特に、バインダーの溶解性、塗布性、安全性を考慮して選ばれることが好ましい。
<< Organic solvent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one organic solvent.
The organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it can satisfy the solubility of each coexisting component and the coating property when it is a colored composition, and in particular, the solubility, coating property, and safety of the binder. Is preferably selected in consideration of
 有機溶剤としては、エステル類、エーテル類、ケトン類、芳香族炭化水素類が用いられ、具体的には、特開2012-032754号公報の段落番号0161~0162に記載のものが例示される。 Examples of the organic solvent include esters, ethers, ketones, and aromatic hydrocarbons, and specific examples include those described in paragraph numbers 0161 to 0162 of JP2012-032754A.
 これらの有機溶剤は、前述の各成分の溶解性、およびアルカリ可溶性ポリマーを含む場合はその溶解性、塗布面状の改良などの観点から、2種以上を混合することも好ましい。この場合、特に好ましくは、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、およびプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートから選択される2種以上で構成される混合溶液である。 These organic solvents are preferably mixed in two or more types from the viewpoints of the solubility of each of the above-mentioned components and, when an alkali-soluble polymer is included, the solubility of the components and the improvement of the coated surface. In this case, particularly preferably, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl carbitol It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
 有機溶剤の着色組成物中における含有量としては、組成物中の全固形分濃度が10質量%~80質量%になる量が好ましく、15質量%~60質量%になる量がより好ましい。
 本発明の組成物は、有機溶剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the organic solvent in the colored composition is preferably such that the total solid concentration in the composition is 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and more preferably 15% by mass to 60% by mass.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic solvent or two or more types of organic solvents. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<アルカリ可溶性バインダー>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、アルカリ可溶性バインダーを含んでいることが好ましい。アルカリ可溶性バインダーは、アルカリ可溶性を有すること以外は、特に限定はなく、好ましくは、耐熱性、現像性、入手性等の観点から選択することができる。
<< Alkali-soluble binder >>
It is preferable that the coloring composition of this invention contains the alkali-soluble binder. The alkali-soluble binder is not particularly limited except that it has alkali solubility, and can be preferably selected from the viewpoints of heat resistance, developability, availability, and the like.
 アルカリ可溶性バインダーとしては、線状有機高分子重合体であり、且つ、有機溶剤に可溶で、弱アルカリ水溶液で現像できるものが好ましい。このような線状有機高分子重合体としては、側鎖にカルボン酸を有するポリマー、例えば、特開昭59-44615号、特公昭54-34327号、特公昭58-12577号、特公昭54-25957号、特開昭59-53836号、特開昭59-71048号の各公報に記載されているような、メタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体等が挙げられ、同様に側鎖にカルボン酸を有する酸性セルロース誘導体が有用である。 The alkali-soluble binder is preferably a linear organic polymer, soluble in an organic solvent and developable with a weak alkaline aqueous solution. Examples of such linear organic high molecular polymers include polymers having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-. No. 25957, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, etc. Examples thereof include polymers, maleic acid copolymers, partially esterified maleic acid copolymers, and acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain are also useful.
 上述したものの他、本発明におけるアルカリ可溶性バインダーとしては、水酸基を有するポリマーに酸無水物を付加させたもの等や、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、ポリ(2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート)、ポリビニルピロリドンやポリエチレンオキサイド、ポリビニルアルコール、等も有用である。また、線状有機高分子重合体は、親水性を有するモノマーを共重合したものであってもよい。この例としては、アルコキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート、グリセロール(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-メチロールアクリルアミド、2級若しくは3級のアルキルアクリルアミド、ジアルキルアミノアルキル(メタ)アクリレート、モルホリン(メタ)アクリレート、N-ビニルピロリドン、N-ビニルカプロラクタム、ビニルイミダゾール、ビニルトリアゾール、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、分岐若しくは直鎖のプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、分岐若しくは直鎖のブチル(メタ)アクリレート、または、フェノキシヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、等が挙げられる。その他、親水性を有するモノマーとしては、テトラヒドロフルフリル基、燐酸基、燐酸エステル基、4級アンモニウム塩基、エチレンオキシ鎖、プロピレンオキシ鎖、スルホン酸基およびその塩由来の基、モルホリノエチル基等を含んでなるモノマー等も有用である。 In addition to the above, the alkali-soluble binder in the present invention includes those obtained by adding an acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, poly (2-hydroxyethyl (meth)). Acrylate), polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene oxide, polyvinyl alcohol, and the like are also useful. Further, the linear organic high molecular polymer may be a copolymer of hydrophilic monomers. Examples include alkoxyalkyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate, glycerol (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, N-methylol acrylamide, secondary or tertiary alkyl acrylamide, dialkylaminoalkyl (meth) Acrylate, morpholine (meth) acrylate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylcaprolactam, vinylimidazole, vinyltriazole, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, branched or linear propyl (meth) acrylate, branched or straight Examples include chain butyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyhydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, and the like. Other hydrophilic monomers include tetrahydrofurfuryl group, phosphoric acid group, phosphoric ester group, quaternary ammonium base, ethyleneoxy chain, propyleneoxy chain, sulfonic acid group and groups derived from salts thereof, morpholinoethyl group, etc. Monomers comprising it are also useful.
 アルカリ可溶性バインダーとしては、下記式(b1)および(b2)に示すようなマレイミドとエチレンオキサイドの共重合体も好ましく用いることが出来る。 As the alkali-soluble binder, a copolymer of maleimide and ethylene oxide as shown in the following formulas (b1) and (b2) can also be preferably used.
式(b1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
(式(b1)中、R1は、水素原子、アリール基、またはアルキル基を表す。)
 R1がアルキル基を表す場合のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~10の分岐鎖を有するアルキル基、炭素数5~20の環状アルキル基などが挙げられ、より具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基などが挙げられる。
 アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよく、アルキル基に導入可能な置換基としては、フェニル基、カルボニル基、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基などが挙げられる。
 R1がアリール基を表す場合のアリール基としては、単環構造のアリール基、多環構造のアリール基、縮環構造のアリール基、ヘテロ原子を含むヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。より具体的には、フェニル基、ナフチル基、ビフェニル基、ベンゾイミダゾリル基、ピリジル基、フリル基などが挙げられる。
 アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、アリール基に導入可能な置換基としては、メチル基、エチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基等のアルキル基、メトキシ基等のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、ニトロ基、クロロ基、ブロモ基などが挙げられる。
Formula (b1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
(In formula (b1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an aryl group, or an alkyl group.)
Examples of the alkyl group when R 1 represents an alkyl group include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having a branched chain having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. More specifically, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group and the like can be mentioned.
The alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the alkyl group include a phenyl group, a carbonyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, and an amino group.
When R 1 represents an aryl group, examples of the aryl group include a monocyclic aryl group, a polycyclic aryl group, a condensed ring aryl group, a heteroaryl group containing a hetero atom, and the like. More specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a biphenyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a furyl group, and the like can be given.
The aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the aryl group include an alkyl group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, and a cyclohexyl group, an alkoxy group such as a methoxy group, Examples thereof include a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a nitro group, a chloro group, and a bromo group.
式(b2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
(式(b2)中、R2は、水素原子またはメチル基を表す。R3は、炭素数2または3のアルキレン基であり、R4は、水素原子、アリール基、またはアルキル基を表し、mは、1~15の整数を表す。)
Formula (b2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
(In formula (b2), R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 3 represents an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an aryl group, or an alkyl group, m represents an integer of 1 to 15.)
 R4がアルキル基を表す場合のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~20の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数1~20の分岐鎖を有するアルキル基、炭素数5~20の環状アルキル基などが挙げられ、より具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基などが挙げられる。
 アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよく、アルキル基に導入可能な置換基としては、フェニル基、カルボニル基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。
 R4がアリール基を表す場合のアリール基としては、単環構造のアリール基、多環構造のアリール基、縮環構造のアリール基、ヘテロ原子を含むヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。より具体的には、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラニル基、ビフェニル基、ベンゾイミダゾリル基、インドリル基、イミダゾリル基、オキサゾリル基、カルバゾリル基、ピリジル基、フリル基などが挙げられる。
 アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、アリール基に導入可能な置換基としては、ノニル基、メチル基、エチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基等のアルキル基、メトキシ基等のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、ニトロ基、クロロ基、ブロモ基などが挙げられる。
Examples of the alkyl group when R 4 represents an alkyl group include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having a branched chain having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. More specifically, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, and the like can be given.
The alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the alkyl group include a phenyl group, a carbonyl group, and an alkoxy group.
Examples of the aryl group when R 4 represents an aryl group include a monocyclic aryl group, a polycyclic aryl group, a condensed ring aryl group, and a heteroaryl group containing a heteroatom. More specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthranyl group, a biphenyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, an indolyl group, an imidazolyl group, an oxazolyl group, a carbazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a furyl group, and the like can be given.
The aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the aryl group include a nonyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group and other alkyl groups, and a methoxy group. Examples thereof include an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a nitro group, a chloro group, and a bromo group.
 また、アルカリ可溶性バインダーは、架橋効率を向上させるために、重合性基を側鎖に有してもよく、例えば、アリル基、(メタ)アクリル基、アリルオキシアルキル基等を側鎖に含有するポリマー等も有用である。上述の重合性基を含有するポリマーの例としては、市販品のKSレジスト-106(大阪有機化学工業(株)製)、サイクロマーPシリーズ(ダイセル化学工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。また、硬化皮膜の強度を上げるためにアルコール可溶性ナイロンや2,2-ビス-(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)-プロパンとエピクロロヒドリンとのポリエーテル等も有用である。 The alkali-soluble binder may have a polymerizable group in the side chain in order to improve the crosslinking efficiency, and includes, for example, an allyl group, a (meth) acryl group, an allyloxyalkyl group, etc. in the side chain. Polymers and the like are also useful. Examples of the above-mentioned polymer containing a polymerizable group include commercially available KS resist-106 (manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), cyclomer P series (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and the like. In addition, in order to increase the strength of the cured film, alcohol-soluble nylon, polyether of 2,2-bis- (4-hydroxyphenyl) -propane and epichlorohydrin, etc. are also useful.
 これら各種アルカリ可溶性バインダーの中でも、耐熱性の観点からは、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましく、現像性制御の観点からは、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましい。 Among these various alkali-soluble binders, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable, and from the viewpoint of development control. Are preferably acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins.
 特に、下記一般式(2)で示すような繰り返し単位と酸性基を有する共重合体が好ましく、より好ましくは一般式(2)と酸性基に加え、一般式(3)で表される構造単位を有する共重合体が挙げられる。 In particular, a copolymer having a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (2) and an acidic group is preferred, and more preferably a structural unit represented by the general formula (3) in addition to the general formula (2) and the acidic group. And a copolymer having.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
(一般式(2)中、R20は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、R21~R25は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アルキル基、またはアリール基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
(In the general formula (2), R 20 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 21 to R 25 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
(一般式(3)中、R11は、水素原子またはメチル基を表す。R12およびR13は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または不飽和二重結合を部分構造として含む炭素数3~20のカルボニル基を表し、R12およびR13の双方が水素原子であることはない。R12およびR13の少なくとも一方が不飽和二重結合を部分構造として含む炭素数3~20のカルボニル基を表す場合、さらにカルボキシ基を部分構造として含んでいてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
(In General Formula (3), R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. R 12 and R 13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an unsaturated double bond having 3 to 20 carbon atoms as a partial structure. R 12 and R 13 are not both hydrogen atoms, and at least one of R 12 and R 13 is a carbonyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms containing an unsaturated double bond as a partial structure. When represented, it may further contain a carboxy group as a partial structure.)
 アクリル系樹脂としては、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル酸、ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリルアミド等から選ばれるモノマーからなる共重合体や、市販品のKSレジスト-106(大阪有機化学工業(株)製)、サイクロマーPシリーズ(ダイセル化学工業(株)製)等が好ましい。 Examples of acrylic resins include copolymers composed of monomers selected from benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, and the like, and commercially available KS resist 106 (Osaka). Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P Series (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and the like are preferable.
 また、アルカリ可溶性バインダーは、下記式(X)で示されるエチレン性不飽和単量体に由来する構造単位を含んでいてもよい。
一般式(X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
(式(X)において、R1は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、R2は炭素数2~10のアルキレン基を表し、R3は、水素原子またはベンゼン環を含んでもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。nは1~15の整数を表す。)
Moreover, the alkali-soluble binder may contain a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer represented by the following formula (X).
Formula (X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
(In Formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring which may contain a benzene ring. And represents an alkyl group of 20. n represents an integer of 1 to 15.)
 上記式(X)において、R2のアルキレン基の炭素数は、2~3であることが好ましい。また、R3のアルキル基の炭素数は1~20であるが、より好ましくは1~10であり、R3のアルキル基はベンゼン環を含んでもよい。R3で表されるベンゼン環を含むアルキル基としては、ベンジル基、2-フェニル(イソ)プロピル基等を挙げることができる。 In the above formula (X), the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring. Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
 アルカリ可溶性バインダーは、現像性、液粘度等の観点から、重量平均分子量(GPC法で測定されたポリスチレン換算値)が1,000~200,000の重合体が好ましく、2,000~100,000の重合体がより好ましく、5,000~50,000の重合体が特に好ましい。 The alkali-soluble binder is preferably a polymer having a weight average molecular weight (polystyrene equivalent value measured by GPC method) of 1,000 to 200,000 from the viewpoint of developability, liquid viscosity, etc., and 2,000 to 100,000. More preferred is a polymer of 5,000 to 50,000.
 アルカリ可溶性バインダーの配合量は、着色組成物の全固形分の10~80質量%であることが好ましく、20~60質量%であることがより好ましい。
 また、アルカリ可溶性バインダーの酸価は、10~1000mg/KOHが好ましく、50~300mg/KOHがより好ましく、50~200mg/KOHがさらに好ましく、105~200mg/KOHが特に好ましい。
 本発明の組成物は、アルカリ可溶性バインダーを、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The blending amount of the alkali-soluble binder is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 20 to 60% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
The acid value of the alkali-soluble binder is preferably 10 to 1000 mg / KOH, more preferably 50 to 300 mg / KOH, still more preferably 50 to 200 mg / KOH, and particularly preferably 105 to 200 mg / KOH.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of alkali-soluble binder or two or more kinds. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<架橋剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、架橋剤をさらに含んでいてもよい。
 架橋剤としては、架橋反応により膜硬化を行なえるものであれば、特に限定はなく、例えば、(a)エポキシ樹脂、(b)メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの置換基で置換された、メラミン化合物、グアナミン化合物、グリコールウリル化合物またはウレア化合物、(c)メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの置換基で置換された、フェノール化合物、ナフトール化合物またはヒドロキシアントラセン化合物、が挙げられる。中でも、多官能エポキシ樹脂が好ましい。
 架橋剤の具体例などの詳細については、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0134~0147の記載を参照することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< Crosslinking agent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may further contain a crosslinking agent.
The crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction. For example, at least selected from (a) an epoxy resin, (b) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group. Substituted with at least one substituent selected from a melamine compound, a guanamine compound, a glycoluril compound or a urea compound, (c) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group, which is substituted with one substituent; Phenol compounds, naphthol compounds or hydroxyanthracene compounds. Of these, polyfunctional epoxy resins are preferred.
For details such as specific examples of the crosslinking agent, reference can be made to the description in paragraphs 0134 to 0147 of JP-A No. 2004-295116, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を含んでいても良い。界面活性剤は、ノニオン系、カチオン系、アニオン系のいずれでもよいが、エチレンオキサイド構造を持つ界面活性剤、フッ素系界面活性剤が好ましい。特にHLB値が9.2~15.5の範囲にあるエチレンオキサイド構造を持つ界面活性剤もしくは特開平2-54202号公報記載のフッ素系界面活性剤が好ましい。
 本発明の着色組成物に界面活性剤を含有する場合、界面活性剤の添加量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.0001質量%~2.0質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.005質量%~1.0質量%である。
 本発明の組成物は、界面活性剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< Surfactant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant. The surfactant may be nonionic, cationic, or anionic, but a surfactant having an ethylene oxide structure and a fluorosurfactant are preferred. In particular, a surfactant having an ethylene oxide structure having an HLB value in the range of 9.2 to 15.5 or a fluorosurfactant described in JP-A-2-54202 is preferred.
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a surfactant, the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 2.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition, and more preferably. Is 0.005% by mass to 1.0% by mass.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
 本発明の着色組成物は、さらに必要に応じて、充填材、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤、増感剤や光安定剤等など各種添加剤を含んでいても良い。 The colored composition of the present invention may further contain various additives such as a filler, an antioxidant, an ultraviolet absorber, an anti-aggregation agent, a sensitizer and a light stabilizer as necessary.
<<染料安定化剤>>
 本発明の組成物には、トリアリールメタン染料とは別に、染料安定化剤を添加することが好ましい。安定化剤としては、例えば、カチオン系、アニオン系、ノニオン系、両性、シリコーン系、フッ素系等の界面活性剤を使用できる。界面活性剤の中でも、均一に、微細に分散し得る点から、高分子界面活性剤(高分子分散剤)が好ましい。
 高分子分散剤としては、例えば、ポリアクリル酸エステル等の不飽和カルボン酸エステルの(共)重合体類;ポリアクリル酸等の不飽和カルボン酸の(共)重合体の(部分)アミン塩、(部分)アンモニウム塩や(部分)アルキルアミン塩類;水酸基含有ポリアクリル酸エステル等の水酸基含有不飽和カルボン酸エステルの(共)重合体やそれらの編成物;架橋性基を有するスルホン酸やリン酸の重合物等が挙げられる。
 架橋性基としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な架橋性基を用いることができる。具体的には(メタ)アクリル基、スチレン基、ビニル基、環状エーテル基、メチロール基が挙げられるが、(メタ)アクリル基、スチレン基、ビニル基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリル基およびスチレン基がより好ましい。
 またこれら界面活性剤のほかにビストリフルオロメタンスルホンイミドナトリウム塩や、下記アニオンの塩(ナトリウム塩、カリウム塩等)を加えることも有効である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
<< Dye stabilizer >>
In addition to the triarylmethane dye, a dye stabilizer is preferably added to the composition of the present invention. As the stabilizer, for example, cationic, anionic, nonionic, amphoteric, silicone, and fluorine surfactants can be used. Among the surfactants, a polymer surfactant (polymer dispersant) is preferable because it can be uniformly and finely dispersed.
Examples of the polymer dispersant include (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as polyacrylic acid esters; (partial) amine salts of (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid such as polyacrylic acid; (Partial) ammonium salt and (partial) alkylamine salt; (co) polymer of hydroxyl group-containing unsaturated carboxylic acid ester such as hydroxyl group-containing polyacrylic acid ester or knitted product thereof; sulfonic acid or phosphoric acid having a crosslinkable group And the like.
As the crosslinkable group, a crosslinkable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, an acid, or heat can be used. Specific examples include (meth) acryl groups, styrene groups, vinyl groups, cyclic ether groups, and methylol groups, with (meth) acryl groups, styrene groups, and vinyl groups being preferred, and (meth) acryl groups and styrene groups being preferred. More preferred.
In addition to these surfactants, it is also effective to add bistrifluoromethanesulfonimide sodium salt and the following anion salts (sodium salt, potassium salt, etc.).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
<酸化防止剤>
 本発明の組成物は、酸化防止剤を含んでいてもよい。酸化防止剤としては、例えば、ラジカル捕捉剤、過酸化物分解剤、紫外線吸収剤、一重項酸素クエンチャー等を挙げることができる。
 ラジカル捕捉剤としては、例えば、フェノール系酸化防止剤、ヒンダードアミン系酸化防止剤等を挙げることができる。フェノール系酸化防止剤としては、例えば、ヒドロキシフェニルプロピオネート系化合物、ヒドロキシベンジル系化合物、チオビスフェノール系化合物、チオメチルフェノール系化合物、アルカンジイルフェノール系化合物等を挙げることができる。中でも、色特性の安定性の観点から、ヒドロキシフェニルプロピオネート系化合物が好ましい。
 過酸化物分解剤は、光に曝露されること等により発生した過酸化物を無害な物質に分解し、新たなラジカルが発生しないようにする化合物であり、例えば、リン系酸化防止剤、イオウ系酸化防止剤等を挙げることができる。中でも、色特性の安定性の観点から、イオウ系酸化防止剤が好ましい。
 紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、サルチル酸エステル系酸化防止剤、ベンゾフェノン系酸化防止剤を挙げることができる。
 一重項酸素クエンチャーは、一重項状態の酸素からのエネルギー移動により一重項酸素を失活させ得る化合物であり、例えば、テトラメチルエチレン、シクロペンテン等のエチレン性化合物、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、1,4-ジアザビシクロオクタン(DABCO)、N-エチルイミダゾール等のアミン類、置換されても良いナフタレン、ジメチルナフタレン、ジメトキシアントラセン、アントラセン、ジフェニルアントラセン等の縮合多環芳香族化合物;1,3-ジフェニルイソベンゾフラン、1,2,3,4-テトラフェニル-1,3-シクロペンタジエン、ペンタフェニルシクロペンタジエン等の芳香族化合物の他、Harry H.wasserman,“Singlet Oxygen”,5章,Academic Press(1979)、Nicholas J.Turro,“”Modern Molecular Photochemistry“”,14章,The Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co.,Inc.(1978)、およびCMC社発行 カラー写真感光材料用高機能ケミカルス,7章(2002)に、一重項酸素クエンチャーとして例示されている化合物を挙げることができる。
 このほかに硫黄原子を有する化合物を配位子とする金属錯体を挙げることができる。このような化合物としてビスジチオ-α-ジケトン、ビスフェニルジチオール、およびチオビスフェノールを配位子とする、ニッケル錯体、コバルト錯体、銅錯体、マンガン錯体、白金錯体等の遷移金属キレート化合物を挙げることができる。
 イオウ系酸化防止剤としては、チオプロピオネート系化合物、メルカプトベンズイミダゾール系化合物を挙げることができる。中でも、色特性の安定性の観点から、チオプロピオネート系化合物が好ましい。
<Antioxidant>
The composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant. Examples of the antioxidant include a radical scavenger, a peroxide decomposer, an ultraviolet absorber, and a singlet oxygen quencher.
Examples of the radical scavenger include phenolic antioxidants and hindered amine antioxidants. Examples of phenolic antioxidants include hydroxyphenylpropionate compounds, hydroxybenzyl compounds, thiobisphenol compounds, thiomethylphenol compounds, alkanediylphenol compounds, and the like. Of these, hydroxyphenylpropionate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
A peroxide decomposer is a compound that decomposes peroxides generated by exposure to light into harmless substances and prevents the generation of new radicals. For example, phosphorus antioxidants, sulfur And system antioxidants. Among these, sulfur-based antioxidants are preferable from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include salicylate-based antioxidants and benzophenone-based antioxidants.
A singlet oxygen quencher is a compound capable of deactivating singlet oxygen by energy transfer from oxygen in a singlet state. Amines such as diazabicyclooctane (DABCO) and N-ethylimidazole, condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds such as optionally substituted naphthalene, dimethylnaphthalene, dimethoxyanthracene, anthracene and diphenylanthracene; 1,3-diphenylisobenzofuran In addition to aromatic compounds such as 1,2,3,4-tetraphenyl-1,3-cyclopentadiene and pentaphenylcyclopentadiene, Harry H. et al. wasserman, “Single Oxygen”, Chapter 5, Academic Press (1979), Nicholas J. et al. Turro, ““ Modern Molecular Photochemistry ””, Chapter 14, The Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. , Inc. (1978), and CMC Co., Ltd., High Performance Chemicals for Color Photosensitive Materials, Chapter 7 (2002) can include compounds exemplified as singlet oxygen quenchers.
In addition, a metal complex having a sulfur atom-containing compound as a ligand can be exemplified. Examples of such compounds include transition metal chelate compounds such as nickel complexes, cobalt complexes, copper complexes, manganese complexes, and platinum complexes having bisdithio-α-diketone, bisphenyldithiol, and thiobisphenol as ligands. .
Examples of the sulfur antioxidant include thiopropionate compounds and mercaptobenzimidazole compounds. Of these, thiopropionate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
 本発明において、酸化防止剤は、単独でまたは2種以上を混合して使用することができる。酸化防止剤の含有量は、着色剤100質量に対して、好ましくは0.01~20質量部、特に好ましくは0.1~10質量部である。 In the present invention, the antioxidants can be used alone or in admixture of two or more. The content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, particularly preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the colorant.
<硬化剤>
 本発明の着色組成物は、硬化剤として機能する化合物を含有することができる。
 例えば、芳香族アミン化合物、3級アミン化合物、アミン塩、ホスホニウム塩、アミジン塩、アミド化合物、チオール化合物、ブロックイソシアネート化合物およびイミダゾール環含有化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つの化合物を用いることができる。
 着色組成物が、このような硬化剤を含有することにより、着色パターンの低温硬化をより効果的に実現することができる。併せて、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上させることもできる。
<Curing agent>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a compound that functions as a curing agent.
For example, at least one compound selected from the group consisting of aromatic amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, amine salts, phosphonium salts, amidine salts, amide compounds, thiol compounds, blocked isocyanate compounds, and imidazole ring-containing compounds can be used. .
When the coloring composition contains such a curing agent, the low-temperature curing of the coloring pattern can be more effectively realized. In addition, the storage stability of the colored composition can be further improved.
<還元防止剤>
 本発明の着色組成物は、上記染料よりも還元されやすい化合物を染料の還元防止剤として添加することもできる。これにより、画素形成後のITOスパッタ時に染料還元褪色をより抑制することができる。具体的にはキノン化合物が好ましく、分子量100~800程度の以下構造のキノン化合物が好ましい。
<Reducing inhibitor>
In the colored composition of the present invention, a compound that is more easily reduced than the above dye can be added as an anti-reduction agent for the dye. Thereby, dye reduction fading can be further suppressed during ITO sputtering after pixel formation. Specifically, a quinone compound is preferable, and a quinone compound having a molecular weight of about 100 to 800 and having the following structure is preferable.
 本発明の着色組成物は、さらに必要に応じて、充填材、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤、増感剤や光安定剤等など各種添加剤を含んでいても良い。 The colored composition of the present invention may further contain various additives such as a filler, an ultraviolet absorber, an aggregation inhibitor, a sensitizer and a light stabilizer, as necessary.
[着色組成物の調製方法]
 本発明の着色組成物は、前述の各成分と必要に応じて任意成分とを混合することで調製される。
 なお、着色組成物の調製に際しては、着色組成物を構成する各成分を一括配合してもよいし、各成分を溶剤に溶解・分散した後に逐次配合してもよい。また、配合する際の投入順序や作業条件は特に制約を受けない。例えば、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解・分散して組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じては、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液・分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して組成物として調製してもよい。
 上記のようにして調製された着色組成物は、好ましくは、孔径0.01μm~3.0μm、より好ましくは孔径0.05μm~0.5μm程度のフィルタなどを用いて濾別した後、使用に供することができる。
[Preparation method of coloring composition]
The coloring composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the above-described components and optional components as necessary.
In preparing the colored composition, the components constituting the colored composition may be mixed together, or may be sequentially added after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the charging order and working conditions when blending. For example, the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
The colored composition prepared as described above is preferably used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.01 μm to 3.0 μm, more preferably a pore size of about 0.05 μm to 0.5 μm. Can be provided.
 本発明の着色組成物は、色相およびコントラストに優れた着色硬化膜を形成することができるため、液晶表示装置(LCD)や固体撮像素子(例えば、CCD、CMOS等)に用いられるカラーフィルタなどの着色画素形成用として、また、印刷インキ、インクジェットインキ、および塗料などの作製用途として好適に用いることができる。特に、液晶表示装置用の着色画素形成用途に好適である。 Since the colored composition of the present invention can form a colored cured film excellent in hue and contrast, it can be used in liquid crystal display devices (LCD) and color filters used in solid-state imaging devices (for example, CCD, CMOS, etc.). It can be suitably used for forming colored pixels and for producing printing ink, inkjet ink, paint, and the like. In particular, it is suitable for use in forming colored pixels for liquid crystal display devices.
[カラーフィルタおよびその製造方法]
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、基板と、この基板上に本発明の着色組成物を含む着色領域と、を設けて構成されたものである。基板上の着色領域は、カラーフィルタの各画素をなす例えば赤(R)、緑(G)、青(B)等の着色膜で構成されている。
[Color filter and manufacturing method thereof]
The color filter of the present invention is configured by providing a substrate and a colored region containing the colored composition of the present invention on the substrate. The colored region on the substrate is composed of colored films such as red (R), green (G), and blue (B) that form each pixel of the color filter.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、本発明の着色組成物を基板上に適用して硬化された着色領域(着色パターン)を形成できる方法であれば、いずれの方法で形成されてもよい。好ましくは、本発明の着色組成物を用いて作製される。
 また、本発明の着色組成物を用いて固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを製造する場合には、特開2011-252065号公報の段落0359~0371に記載されている製造方法を採用することもできる。
The color filter of the present invention may be formed by any method as long as it can form a colored region (colored pattern) cured by applying the colored composition of the present invention on a substrate. Preferably, it is produced using the coloring composition of the present invention.
In the case of producing a color filter for a solid-state imaging device using the colored composition of the present invention, the production method described in paragraphs 0359 to 0371 of JP2011-252065A can also be employed. .
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、基板上に既述の着色組成物を適用(好ましくは、塗布)し、着色層(着色組成物層ともいう。)を形成する工程(A)と、工程(A)にて形成された着色組成物層を硬化させる工程(B)を有する。
 硬化させる工程は、(好ましくはマスクを介して)パターン状に露光し、塗布膜の未硬化部を現像液で現像除去して着色領域(着色パターン)を形成することが好ましい。これらの工程を経ることで、各色(3色或いは4色)の画素からなる着色パターンが形成され、カラーフィルタを得ることができる。また、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法では、特に、工程(B)で形成された着色パターンに対して紫外線を照射する工程(C)と、工程(C)で紫外線が照射された着色パターンに対して加熱処理を行なう工程(D)とをさらに設けた態様が好ましい。
 このような方法により、液晶表示素子や固体撮像素子に用いられるカラーフィルタをプロセス上の困難性が少なく、高品質で、かつ低コストに作製することができる。
 以下、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法について、より具体的に説明する。
The method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes a step (A) of applying (preferably coating) the above-described colored composition on a substrate to form a colored layer (also referred to as a colored composition layer), and a step It has the process (B) which hardens the coloring composition layer formed in (A).
The curing step is preferably performed in a pattern (preferably through a mask), and the uncured portion of the coating film is developed and removed with a developer to form a colored region (colored pattern). By passing through these steps, a colored pattern composed of pixels of each color (3 colors or 4 colors) is formed, and a color filter can be obtained. In the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, in particular, the step (C) of irradiating the colored pattern formed in the step (B) with ultraviolet rays and the colored pattern irradiated with the ultraviolet rays in the step (C) are applied. On the other hand, the aspect which further provided the process (D) which heat-processes is preferable.
By such a method, a color filter used for a liquid crystal display element or a solid-state imaging element can be manufactured with low process difficulty, high quality, and low cost.
Hereinafter, the manufacturing method of the color filter of the present invention will be described more specifically.
-工程(A)-
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法では、まず、基板上に直接または他の層を介して、既述の本発明の着色組成物を所望の塗布方法により塗布して、着色組成物からなる塗布膜(着色組成物層)を形成し、その後、必要に応じて、予備硬化(プリベーク)を行ない、この着色組成物層を乾燥させる。
-Process (A)-
In the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, first, the above-described colored composition of the present invention is applied onto a substrate directly or via another layer by a desired coating method, and a coating film comprising the colored composition is formed. (Coloring composition layer) is formed, and then pre-curing (pre-baking) is performed as necessary, and the coloring composition layer is dried.
 基板としては、例えば、液晶表示素子等に用いられる無アルカリガラス、ナトリウムガラス、パイレックス(登録商標)ガラス、石英ガラス、およびこれらに透明導電膜を付着させたものや、固体撮像素子等に用いられる光電変換素子基板、例えば、シリコーン基板や、プラスチック基板等が挙げられる。また、これらの基板上には、各画素を隔離するブラックマトリックスが形成されていたり、密着促進等のために透明樹脂層が設けられたりしていてもよい。また、基板上には必要により、上部の層との密着改良、物質の拡散防止、或いは表面の平坦化のために、下塗り層を設けてもよい。
 また、プラスチック基板は、その表面に、ガスバリヤー層および/または耐溶剤性層を有していることが好ましい。
As the substrate, for example, alkali-free glass, sodium glass, Pyrex (registered trademark) glass, quartz glass used for liquid crystal display elements and the like, and those obtained by attaching a transparent conductive film thereto, solid-state imaging elements, and the like are used. Examples of the photoelectric conversion element substrate include a silicone substrate and a plastic substrate. Further, on these substrates, a black matrix for isolating each pixel may be formed, or a transparent resin layer may be provided for promoting adhesion. Further, if necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on the substrate in order to improve adhesion to the upper layer, prevent diffusion of substances, or flatten the surface.
The plastic substrate preferably has a gas barrier layer and / or a solvent resistant layer on its surface.
 このほか、基板として、薄膜トランジスター(TFT)方式カラー液晶表示装置の薄膜トランジスター(TFT)が配置された駆動用基板(以下、「TFT方式液晶駆動用基板」という。)を用い、この駆動用基板上にも、本発明の着色組成物を用いてなる着色パターンを形成し、カラーフィルタを作製することができる。
 TFT方式液晶駆動用基板における基板としては、例えば、ガラス、シリコーン、ポリカーボネート、ポリエステル、芳香族ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド、ポリイミド等を挙げることができる。これらの基板には、所望により、シランカップリング剤等による薬品処理、プラズマ処理、イオンプレーティング、スパッタリング、気相反応法、真空蒸着等の適宜の前処理を施しておくこともできる。例えば、TFT方式液晶駆動用基板の表面に、窒化ケイ素膜等のパッシベーション膜を形成した基板を用いることができる。
In addition, a driving substrate on which a thin film transistor (TFT) of a thin film transistor (TFT) type color liquid crystal display device is disposed (hereinafter referred to as “TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate”) is used as the substrate. A color filter using the colored composition of the present invention can also be formed on the top to produce a color filter.
Examples of the substrate in the TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate include glass, silicone, polycarbonate, polyester, aromatic polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide. These substrates may be subjected to appropriate pretreatment such as chemical treatment with a silane coupling agent or the like, plasma treatment, ion plating, sputtering, gas phase reaction method, vacuum deposition, etc., if desired. For example, a substrate in which a passivation film such as a silicon nitride film is formed on the surface of the TFT liquid crystal driving substrate can be used.
 本発明の着色組成物を、直接または他の層を介して基板に、適用する。適用する方法としては、塗布が好ましく、回転塗布、スリット塗布、流延塗布、ロール塗布、バー塗布、インクジェット等の塗布方法により塗布することが好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention is applied to the substrate directly or via another layer. As a method to be applied, coating is preferable, and coating is preferably performed by a coating method such as spin coating, slit coating, cast coating, roll coating, bar coating, and inkjet.
 塗布工程において、本発明の着色組成物を基板に塗布する方法としては、特に限定されるものではないが、スリット・アンド・スピン法、スピンレス塗布法等のスリットノズルを用いる方法(以下、スリットノズル塗布法という)が好ましい。
 スリットノズル塗布法において、スリット・アンド・スピン塗布法とスピンレス塗布法は、塗布基板の大きさによって条件は異なるが、例えば、スピンレス塗布法により第五世代のガラス基板(1100mm×1250mm)を塗布する場合、スリットノズルからの着色組成物の吐出量は、通常、500マイクロリットル/秒~2000マイクロリットル/秒、好ましくは800マイクロリットル/秒~1500マイクロリットル/秒であり、また、塗工速度は、通常、50mm/秒~300mm/秒、好ましくは100mm/秒~200mm/秒である。
 また、塗布工程で用いられる着色組成物の固形分としては、通常、10%~20%、好ましくは13%~18%である。
In the coating step, the method for applying the colored composition of the present invention to the substrate is not particularly limited, but a method using a slit nozzle such as a slit-and-spin method or a spinless coating method (hereinafter referred to as slit nozzle). The application method is preferred.
In the slit nozzle coating method, the slit-and-spin coating method and the spinless coating method have different conditions depending on the size of the coated substrate. For example, a fifth generation glass substrate (1100 mm × 1250 mm) is coated by the spinless coating method. In this case, the discharge amount of the coloring composition from the slit nozzle is usually 500 microliters / second to 2000 microliters / second, preferably 800 microliters / second to 1500 microliters / second, and the coating speed is Usually, it is 50 mm / second to 300 mm / second, preferably 100 mm / second to 200 mm / second.
The solid content of the coloring composition used in the coating step is usually 10% to 20%, preferably 13% to 18%.
 基板上に本発明の着色組成物による塗布膜を形成する場合、この塗布膜の厚み(プリベーク処理後)としては、一般に0.3μm~5.0μmであり、望ましくは0.5μm~4.0μm、最も望ましくは0.5μm~3.0μmである。
 また、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタの場合であれば、塗布膜の厚み(プリベーク処理後)は、0.5μm~5.0μmの範囲が好ましい。
When forming a coating film of the colored composition of the present invention on a substrate, the thickness of the coating film (after pre-baking treatment) is generally 0.3 μm to 5.0 μm, preferably 0.5 μm to 4.0 μm. Most preferably, the thickness is 0.5 μm to 3.0 μm.
In the case of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, the thickness of the coating film (after pre-baking) is preferably in the range of 0.5 μm to 5.0 μm.
 適用工程において、通常は、適用後にプリベーク処理を施す。必要によっては、プリベーク前に真空処理を施すこともできる。真空乾燥の条件は、真空度が、通常、0.1torr~1.0torr、好ましくは0.2torr~0.5torr程度である。
 また、プリベーク処理は、ホットプレート、オーブン等を用いて50℃~140℃の温度範囲で、好ましくは70℃~110℃程度であり、10秒~300秒の条件にて行うことができる。なお、プリベーク処理には、高周波処理などを併用してもよい。高周波処理は単独でも使用可能である。
In the application process, usually, a pre-bake treatment is performed after application. If necessary, vacuum treatment can be performed before pre-baking. The vacuum drying conditions are such that the degree of vacuum is usually about 0.1 to 1.0 torr, preferably about 0.2 to 0.5 torr.
The pre-bake treatment is performed in a temperature range of 50 ° C. to 140 ° C., preferably about 70 ° C. to 110 ° C., using a hot plate, an oven, etc., and can be performed under conditions of 10 seconds to 300 seconds. Note that high-frequency treatment or the like may be used in combination with the pre-bake treatment. The high frequency treatment can be used alone.
 プリベークの条件としては、ホットプレートやオーブンを用いて、70℃~130℃で、0.5分間~15分間程度加熱する条件が挙げられる。
 また、着色組成物により形成される着色組成物層の厚みは、目的に応じて適宜選択される。液晶表示装置用カラーフィルタにおいては、0.2μm~5.0μmの範囲が好ましく、1.0μm~4.0μmの範囲がさらに好ましく、1.5μm~3.5μmの範囲が最も好ましい。また、固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタにおいては、0.2μm~5.0μmの範囲が好ましく、0.3μm~2.5μmの範囲がさらに好ましく、0.3μm~1.5μmの範囲が最も好ましい。
 なお、着色組成物層の厚みは、プリベーク後の膜厚である。
Examples of the pre-baking condition include a condition of heating at 70 to 130 ° C. for about 0.5 to 15 minutes using a hot plate or an oven.
Moreover, the thickness of the colored composition layer formed of the colored composition is appropriately selected according to the purpose. In the color filter for a liquid crystal display device, the range of 0.2 μm to 5.0 μm is preferable, the range of 1.0 μm to 4.0 μm is more preferable, and the range of 1.5 μm to 3.5 μm is most preferable. In the color filter for a solid-state imaging device, the range of 0.2 μm to 5.0 μm is preferable, the range of 0.3 μm to 2.5 μm is more preferable, and the range of 0.3 μm to 1.5 μm is most preferable.
In addition, the thickness of a coloring composition layer is a film thickness after prebaking.
-工程(B)-
 続いて、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法では、基板上に前述のようにして形成された着色組成物からなる膜(着色組成物層)に対し、例えばフォトマスクを介して露光が行なわれる。露光に適用し得る光もしくは放射線としては、g線、h線、i線、j線、KrF光、ArF光が好ましく、特にi線が好ましい。照射光にi線を用いる場合、100mJ/cm2~10000mJ/cm2の露光量で照射することが好ましい。
-Process (B)-
Subsequently, in the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, the film (colored composition layer) made of the colored composition formed on the substrate as described above is exposed through, for example, a photomask. As light or radiation applicable to exposure, g-line, h-line, i-line, j-line, KrF light and ArF light are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable. When using the i-line to the irradiation light is preferably irradiated at an exposure dose of 100mJ / cm 2 ~ 10000mJ / cm 2.
 また、その他の露光光線としては、超高圧、高圧、中圧、低圧の各水銀灯、ケミカルランプ、カーボンアーク灯、キセノン灯、メタルハライド灯、可視および紫外の各種レーザー光源、蛍光灯、タングステン灯、太陽光等も使用できる。 Other exposure rays include ultra high pressure, high pressure, medium pressure, low pressure mercury lamps, chemical lamps, carbon arc lamps, xenon lamps, metal halide lamps, various visible and ultraviolet laser light sources, fluorescent lamps, tungsten lamps, solar Light or the like can also be used.
レーザー光源を用いた露光工程
 レーザー光源を用いた露光方式では、光源として紫外光レーザーを用いる。
 照射光は、波長が300nm~380nmの範囲である波長の範囲の紫外光レーザーが好ましく、さらに好ましくは300nm~360nmの範囲の波長である紫外光レーザーがレジストの感光波長に合致しているという点で好ましい。具体的には、特に出力が大きく、比較的安価な固体レーザーのNd:YAGレーザーの第三高調波(355nm)や、エキシマレーザーのXeCl(308nm)、XeF(353nm)を好適に用いることができる。
 被露光物(パターン)の露光量としては、1mJ/cm2~100mJ/cm2の範囲であり、1mJ/cm2~50mJ/cm2の範囲がより好ましい。露光量がこの範囲であると、パターン形成の生産性の点で好ましい。
Exposure process using a laser light source In an exposure method using a laser light source, an ultraviolet laser is used as the light source.
The irradiation light is preferably an ultraviolet laser having a wavelength in the range of 300 nm to 380 nm, more preferably an ultraviolet laser having a wavelength in the range of 300 nm to 360 nm matches the photosensitive wavelength of the resist. Is preferable. Specifically, the Nd: YAG laser third harmonic (355 nm), which is a relatively inexpensive solid output, and the excimer laser XeCl (308 nm), XeF (353 nm) can be suitably used. .
The exposure amount of the object to be exposed (pattern) is in the range of 1 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably in the range of 1 mJ / cm 2 to 50 mJ / cm 2 . An exposure amount within this range is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern formation productivity.
 露光装置としては、特に制限はないが市販されているものとしては、Callisto(ブイテクノロジー株式会社製)やEGIS(ブイテクノロジー株式会社製)やDF2200G(大日本スクリーン(株)製)などが使用可能である。また上記以外の装置も好適に用いられる。
 液晶表示装置用のカラーフィルタを製造する際には、プロキシミテイ露光機、ミラープロジェクション露光機により、主として、h線、i線を使用した露光が好ましく用いられる。また、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを製造する際には、ステッパー露光機にて、主として、i線を使用することが好ましい。なお、TFT方式液晶駆動用基板を用いてカラーフィルタを製造する際には、用いられるフォトマスクは、画素(着色パターン)を形成するためのパターンの他、スルーホール或いはコの字型の窪みを形成するためのパターンが設けられているものが使用される。
There are no particular restrictions on the exposure apparatus, but commercially available devices such as Callisto (buoy technology), EGIS (buoy technology), DF2200G (Dainippon Screen) can be used. It is. Further, devices other than those described above are also preferably used.
When manufacturing a color filter for a liquid crystal display device, exposure using mainly h-line and i-line is preferably used by a proximity exposure machine and a mirror projection exposure machine. Further, when manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, it is preferable to mainly use i-line in a stepper exposure machine. When manufacturing a color filter using a TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate, the photomask used has a through hole or a U-shaped depression in addition to a pattern for forming a pixel (colored pattern). The thing in which the pattern for forming is provided is used.
 上記のようにして露光された着色組成物層は加熱することができる。
 また、露光は、着色組成物層中の色材の酸化褪色を抑制するために、チャンバー内に窒素ガスを流しながら行なうことができる。
The colored composition layer exposed as described above can be heated.
The exposure can be performed while flowing a nitrogen gas in the chamber in order to suppress oxidation fading of the coloring material in the colored composition layer.
 続いて、露光後の着色組成物層に対して、現像液にて現像が行なわれる。これにより、ネガ型もしくはポジ型の着色パターン(レジストパターン)を形成することができる。現像工程では、露光後の塗布膜の未硬化部を現像液に溶出させ、硬化分のみを基板上に残存させる。
 現像液は、未硬化部における着色組成物の塗布膜(着色組成物層)を溶解する一方、硬化部を溶解しないものであれば、いずれのものも用いることができる。例えば、種々の有機溶剤の組み合わせやアルカリ性水溶液を用いることができる。
 現像に用いられる有機溶剤としては、本発明の着色組成物を調製する際に使用できる既述の溶剤が挙げられる。
 アルカリ性水溶液としては、例えば、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウム、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5,4,0]-7-ウンデセン等のアルカリ性化合物を、濃度が0.001質量%~10質量%、好ましくは0.01質量%~1質量%となるように溶解したアルカリ性水溶液が挙げられる。現像液がアルカリ性水溶液である場合、アルカリ濃度は、好ましくはpH11~13、さらに好ましくはpH11.5~12.5となるように調整するのがよい。
 アルカリ性水溶液には、例えば、メタノール、エタノール等の水溶性有機溶剤や界面活性剤等を適量添加することもできる。
Subsequently, development is performed with a developer on the colored composition layer after exposure. Thereby, a negative type or positive type coloring pattern (resist pattern) can be formed. In the development step, the uncured portion of the coating film after exposure is eluted in the developer, and only the cured portion remains on the substrate.
Any developer can be used as long as it dissolves the coating film (colored composition layer) of the colored composition in the uncured part, but does not dissolve the cured part. For example, combinations of various organic solvents and alkaline aqueous solutions can be used.
Examples of the organic solvent used for development include the above-described solvents that can be used when preparing the colored composition of the present invention.
Examples of the alkaline aqueous solution include tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate Sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0 ] The concentration of an alkaline compound such as -7-undecene is 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. And alkali aqueous solution was dissolved at a. When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, the alkali concentration is preferably adjusted to pH 11 to 13, more preferably pH 11.5 to 12.5.
An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol or ethanol, a surfactant, or the like can be added to the alkaline aqueous solution.
 現像温度としては、通常は20℃~30℃であり、現像時間としては20秒~90秒である。
 現像は、デイップ方式、シャワー方式、スプレー方式などいずれでもよく、これにスウィング方式、スピン方式、超音波方式などを組み合わせてもよい。現像液に触れる前に、被現像面を予め水等で湿しておいて、現像ムラを防ぐこともできる。また、基板を傾斜させて現像することもできる。
 また、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを製造する場合にはパドル現像も用いられる。
The development temperature is usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., and the development time is 20 seconds to 90 seconds.
Development may be any of a dip method, a shower method, a spray method, and the like, and may be combined with a swing method, a spin method, an ultrasonic method, or the like. It is also possible to prevent development unevenness by previously moistening the surface to be developed with water or the like before touching the developer. It is also possible to develop with the substrate tilted.
Further, when manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, paddle development is also used.
 現像処理後は、余剰の現像液を洗浄除去するリンス処理を経て、乾燥を施した後、硬化を完全なものとするために、加熱処理(ポストベーク)が施される。
 リンス処理は、通常は純水で行なうが、省液のために、最終洗浄で純水を用い、洗浄初期は使用済の純水を使用したり、また、基板を傾斜させて洗浄したり、超音波照射を併用したりする方法を用いてもよい。
After the development process, a rinsing process for washing and removing excess developer is performed, followed by drying, followed by heat treatment (post-baking) to complete the curing.
The rinse treatment is usually performed with pure water, but to save liquid, pure water is used in the final cleaning, and used pure water is used in the initial stage of cleaning, or the substrate is inclined and cleaned. You may use the method of using ultrasonic irradiation together.
 リンス処理後、水切り、乾燥をした後には通常、約200℃~250℃の加熱処理を行なわれる。この加熱処理(ポストベーク)は、現像後の塗布膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式或いはバッチ式で行なうことができる。 After the rinse treatment, after draining and drying, a heat treatment at about 200 ° C. to 250 ° C. is usually performed. In this heat treatment (post-bake), the coating film after development is continuously or batch-treated using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer) or a high-frequency heater so as to satisfy the above conditions. It can be done with an expression.
 以上の各工程を、所望の色相数に合わせて各色毎に順次繰り返し行うことにより、複数色の着色された硬化膜(着色パターン)が形成されてなるカラーフィルタを作製することができる。
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、コントラストが高く、色濃度ムラの小さい、色特性の良好であることから、固体撮像素子または液晶表示素子に好適に用いることができる。
By sequentially repeating the above steps for each color according to the desired number of hues, it is possible to produce a color filter in which a cured film (colored pattern) colored in a plurality of colors is formed.
Since the color filter of the present invention has high contrast, small color density unevenness, and good color characteristics, it can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device or a liquid crystal display device.
-工程(C)-
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法では、特に、着色組成物を用いて形成された着色パターン(画素)に対して、紫外線照射による後露光を行なうこともできる。
-Process (C)-
In the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, in particular, post-exposure by ultraviolet irradiation can be performed on a colored pattern (pixel) formed using a colored composition.
-工程(D)-
 上記のような紫外線照射による後露光が行なわれた着色パターンに対して、さらに加熱処理を行なうことが好ましい。形成された着色パターンを加熱処理(いわゆるポストベーク処理)することにより、着色パターンをさらに硬化させることができる。この加熱処理は、例えば、ホットプレート、各種ヒーター、オーブンなどにより行なうことができる。
 加熱処理の際の温度としては、100℃~300℃であることが好ましく、さらに好ましくは、150℃~250℃である。また、加熱時間は、10分~120分程度が好ましい。
-Process (D)-
It is preferable to further heat-treat the colored pattern that has been post-exposed by ultraviolet irradiation as described above. By heating the formed color pattern (so-called post-bake process), the color pattern can be further cured. This heat treatment can be performed by, for example, a hot plate, various heaters, an oven, or the like.
The temperature during the heat treatment is preferably 100 ° C. to 300 ° C., more preferably 150 ° C. to 250 ° C. The heating time is preferably about 10 minutes to 120 minutes.
 このようにして得られた着色パターンは、カラーフィルタにおける画素を構成する。複数の色相の画素を有するカラーフィルタの作製においては、上記の工程(A)、工程(B)、および必要に応じて工程(C)や工程(D)を所望の色数に合わせて繰り返せばよい。
 なお、単色の着色組成物層の形成、露光、現像が終了する毎に(1色毎に)、上記工程(C)および/または工程(D)を行なってもよいし、所望の色数の全ての着色組成物層の形成、露光、現像が終了した後に、一括して上記工程(C)および/または工程(D)を行なってもよい。
The colored pattern thus obtained constitutes a pixel in the color filter. In the production of a color filter having a plurality of hue pixels, the above steps (A), (B), and if necessary, the steps (C) and (D) are repeated according to the desired number of colors. Good.
It should be noted that the above step (C) and / or step (D) may be performed each time the formation, exposure, and development of the monochromatic coloring composition layer is completed (for each color) After all the colored composition layers have been formed, exposed, and developed, the step (C) and / or the step (D) may be performed collectively.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、ドライエッチング工程を含むカラーフィルタの製造方法にも適用することが可能である。このような製造方法の一例としては、本発明の着色組成物を用いて着色層を形成する工程、上記着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、露光および現像することにより上記フォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、および上記レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして上記着色層をドライエッチングする工程を含む製造方法が挙げられる。本発明の着色組成物が、ドライエッチング工程を含むカラーフィルタの製造方法に用いられる場合は、光硬化性組成物であっても熱硬化性組成物であってもよい。熱硬化性組成物である場合は熱硬化剤を用いることができ、熱硬化剤としては、1分子内にエポキシ基を2つ以上有する化合物が好ましい。 The colored composition of the present invention can also be applied to a color filter manufacturing method including a dry etching step. As an example of such a manufacturing method, the step of forming a colored layer using the colored composition of the present invention, the step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer, the photoresist layer by exposing and developing. Examples of the manufacturing method include a step of patterning to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask. When the colored composition of the present invention is used in a method for producing a color filter including a dry etching step, it may be a photocurable composition or a thermosetting composition. In the case of a thermosetting composition, a thermosetting agent can be used. As the thermosetting agent, a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule is preferable.
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法により得られたカラーフィルタ(本発明のカラーフィルタ)は、本発明の着色組成物を用いていることから、色相およびコントラストに優れている。
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、液晶表示素子や固体撮像素子に用いることが可能であり、特に液晶表示装置の用途に好適である。液晶表示装置に用いた場合、トリアリールメタン染料を着色剤として用い、良好な色相を達成しながら、分光特性およびコントラストに優れた画像の表示が可能になる。
The color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter of the present invention (the color filter of the present invention) is excellent in hue and contrast because the colored composition of the present invention is used.
The color filter of the present invention can be used for a liquid crystal display element or a solid-state image sensor, and is particularly suitable for use in a liquid crystal display device. When used in a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to display an image with excellent spectral characteristics and contrast while achieving a good hue using a triarylmethane dye as a colorant.
 本発明の着色組成物の用途としては、上記において主にカラーフィルタの着色パターンの形成用途を中心に説明したが、カラーフィルタを構成する着色パターン(画素)を隔離するブラックマトリックスの形成にも適用することができる。
 基板上のブラックマトリックスは、カーボンブラック、チタンブラックなどの黒色顔料の加工顔料を含有する着色組成物を用い、塗布、露光、および現像の各工程を経て、その後、必要に応じて、ポストベークすることにより形成することができる。
As for the use of the coloring composition of the present invention, the description has mainly focused on the use for forming the color pattern of the color filter in the above, but it is also applicable to the formation of a black matrix for isolating the color pattern (pixel) constituting the color filter. can do.
For the black matrix on the substrate, a coloring composition containing a black pigment processed pigment such as carbon black or titanium black is used, followed by coating, exposure, and development, and then post-baking as necessary. Can be formed.
[液晶表示装置]
 本発明の液晶表示素子および固体撮像素子は、本発明のカラーフィルタを備えてなるものである。より具体的には、例えば、カラーフィルタの内面側に配向膜を形成し、電極基板と対向させ、間隙部に液晶を満たして密封することにより、本発明の液晶表示素子であるパネルが得られる。また、例えば、受光素子上にカラーフィルタを形成することにより、本発明の固体撮像素子が得られる。
[Liquid Crystal Display]
The liquid crystal display element and the solid-state image sensor of the present invention are provided with the color filter of the present invention. More specifically, for example, by forming an alignment film on the inner surface side of the color filter, facing the electrode substrate, and filling the gap with liquid crystal and sealing, a panel which is the liquid crystal display element of the present invention is obtained. . For example, the solid-state image sensor of this invention is obtained by forming a color filter on a light receiving element.
 液晶表示装置の定義や各表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木 昭夫著、(株)工業調査会 1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹 順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田 龍男編集、(株)工業調査会 1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。 For the definition of liquid crystal display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho) Issued in 1989). The liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”. The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、中でも特に、カラーTFT方式の液晶表示装置に対して有効である。カラーTFT方式の液晶表示装置については、例えば「カラーTFT液晶ディスプレイ(共立出版(株)1996年発行)」に記載されている。さらに、本発明はIPSなどの横電界駆動方式、MVAなどの画素分割方式などの視野角が拡大された液晶表示装置や、STN、TN、VA、OCS、FFS、およびR-OCB等にも適用できる。
 また、本発明のカラーフィルタは、明るく高精細なCOA(Color-filter On Array)方式にも供することが可能である。
The color filter of the present invention is particularly effective for a color TFT liquid crystal display device. The color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”. Furthermore, the present invention is applied to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS and a pixel division method such as MVA, STN, TN, VA, OCS, FFS, and R-OCB. it can.
The color filter of the present invention can also be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system.
 本発明のカラーフィルタを液晶表示素子に用いると、従来公知の冷陰極管の三波長管と組み合わせたときに高いコントラストを実現できるが、さらに、赤、緑、青のLED光源(RGB-LED)をバックライトとすることによって輝度が高く、また、色純度の高い色再現性の良好な液晶表示装置を提供することができる。 When the color filter of the present invention is used for a liquid crystal display element, a high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength tube of a cold cathode tube, and further, red, green and blue LED light sources (RGB-LED). By using as a backlight, a liquid crystal display device having high luminance and high color purity and good color reproducibility can be provided.
[固体撮像素子]
 本発明の着色組成物は、固体撮像素子用途としても好ましく用いることができる。固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明の着色組成物を用いて製造されたカラーフィルタが備えられた構成であり、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
[Solid-state imaging device]
The colored composition of the present invention can be preferably used for a solid-state imaging device. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device is a configuration provided with a color filter manufactured using the colored composition of the present invention, and is not particularly limited as long as the configuration functions as a solid-state imaging device. Such a structure is mentioned.
 支持体上に、固体撮像素子(CCDイメージセンサー、CMOSイメージセンサー、等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、上記フォトダイオードおよび上記転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口したタングステン等からなる遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護層を有し、上記デバイス保護層上に、本発明の固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタを有する構成である。
 更に、上記デバイス保護層上であってカラーフィルタの下(支持体に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。
A transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are disposed on the support A light-shielding film made of tungsten or the like having an opening only in the light-receiving portion of the photodiode, and a device protective layer made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving portion. It is the structure which has the color filter for solid-state image sensors of this invention on a device protective layer.
Further, a configuration having a light condensing means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter) on the device protective layer and under the color filter (on the side close to the support), or a structure having the light condensing means on the color filter. Etc.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「%」および「部」は質量基準である。 The present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “%” and “parts” are based on mass.
 <合成例1>
(化合物I-2の合成)
 化合物I-2は以下のルートにしたがって合成した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
<Synthesis Example 1>
(Synthesis of Compound I-2)
Compound I-2 was synthesized according to the following route.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
(合成中間体(化合物3)の合成)
 化合物1(1-ナフチルアミン)17.0g(118.8mmol)と1,2-エポキシシクロヘキサン11.65g(118.7mmol)をヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール50mLに溶解させた後、5時間加熱還流した。反応終了を確認後、酢酸エチル50mLおよび水、食塩水により目的物を有機層に抽出および洗浄後、濃縮させた。この粗生成物をヘキサンで溶解、再結晶させた後、ろ過することで化合物3を19.2g得た(収率67%)。
(Synthesis of Synthetic Intermediate (Compound 3))
17.0 g (118.8 mmol) of Compound 1 (1-naphthylamine) and 11.65 g (118.7 mmol) of 1,2-epoxycyclohexane were dissolved in 50 mL of hexafluoroisopropanol, and then heated to reflux for 5 hours. After confirming the completion of the reaction, the target compound was extracted into an organic layer with 50 mL of ethyl acetate, water and brine, and then concentrated. This crude product was dissolved in hexane, recrystallized, and then filtered to obtain 19.2 g of Compound 3 (yield 67%).
(合成中間体(化合物4)の合成)
 化合物3(2.4g(10mmol))、およびトリエチルアミン1.5g(15mmol)をTHF10mLに溶解させた。この溶液を0℃に冷却後メタクリル酸クロライド1.15g(11mol)を滴下した。反応完了を確認後酢酸エチル20mLおよび水、食塩水により目的物を有機層に抽出および洗浄後濃縮した。この粗生成物をカラムクロマトグラフィーにより精製することで化合物4を1.8g得た(収率58%)。
(Synthesis of Synthetic Intermediate (Compound 4))
Compound 3 (2.4 g (10 mmol)) and 1.5 g (15 mmol) of triethylamine were dissolved in 10 mL of THF. After the solution was cooled to 0 ° C., 1.15 g (11 mol) of methacrylic acid chloride was added dropwise. After confirming the completion of the reaction, the target product was extracted into an organic layer with 20 mL of ethyl acetate, water and brine, concentrated after washing. This crude product was purified by column chromatography to obtain 1.8 g of Compound 4 (yield 58%).
(化合物I-2の合成)
 化合物4(1.9g(5.8mmol))、化合物5(1.8g(5.8mmol))、オキシ塩化リン1.0g(6.4mmol)をトルエン6mLに溶解し、90℃に加温して1時間攪拌した。反応終了を確認後、この溶液に酢酸エチル10mLを加え目的物を上澄みとして取り出す操作を3回繰り返し、化合物6を酢酸エチル溶液として取り出した。この溶液に別途調整したビストリフルオロメタンスルホンイミドリチウム塩2.0g(7.0mmol)のメタノール20mL溶液を添加した。塩交換反応が完了したことを確認後、水50mLを添加し、化合物を酢酸エチル層に抽出・濃縮後、カラムクロマトグラフィーにより精製することで目的化合物I-2(1.7g(33%))を得た。
1H NMR(CHCl3) :1.25(m,16H)、1.8(s,3H)、3.6(t,8H)、3.75(bs,1H)、5.2(dt,1H)、5.55(s,1H)、6.1(s,1H)、6.2(d,1H)、6.75(d,4H)、7.2-7.5(m,9H)、7.8(d,1H)
(Synthesis of Compound I-2)
Compound 4 (1.9 g (5.8 mmol)), compound 5 (1.8 g (5.8 mmol)), and phosphorus oxychloride 1.0 g (6.4 mmol) were dissolved in 6 mL of toluene and heated to 90 ° C. And stirred for 1 hour. After confirming the completion of the reaction, the operation of adding 10 mL of ethyl acetate to this solution and taking out the target product as a supernatant was repeated three times, and compound 6 was taken out as an ethyl acetate solution. A separately prepared bistrifluoromethanesulfonimide lithium salt 2.0 g (7.0 mmol) in methanol 20 mL was added to this solution. After confirming the completion of the salt exchange reaction, 50 mL of water was added, and the compound was extracted and concentrated in an ethyl acetate layer and purified by column chromatography to obtain the target compound I-2 (1.7 g (33%)). Got.
1 H NMR (CHCl 3 ): 1.25 (m, 16H), 1.8 (s, 3H), 3.6 (t, 8H), 3.75 (bs, 1H), 5.2 (dt, 1H), 5.55 (s, 1H), 6.1 (s, 1H), 6.2 (d, 1H), 6.75 (d, 4H), 7.2-7.5 (m, 9H) ), 7.8 (d, 1H)
<実施例1>
(着色組成物(塗布液)の調製)
<組成>
・下記トリアリールメタン染料(I-1)        ・・・2質量部
・下記光重合性化合物:(T-1)        ・・・10.3質量部
・下記アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1)
 ・・・21.2質量部(固形分換算値:8.5質量部)
・下記光重合開始剤(V-3)         ・・・・1.0質量部
・下記溶剤(X-1)             ・・・・7.2質量部
・下記溶剤(X-2)            ・・・・・0.4質量部
・下記界面活性剤(Z-1)        ・・・・0.006質量部
<Example 1>
(Preparation of coloring composition (coating solution))
<Composition>
The following triarylmethane dye (I-1): 2 parts by mass The following photopolymerizable compound: (T-1): 10.3 parts by mass The following alkali-soluble binder (U-1)
... 21.2 parts by mass (converted to solids: 8.5 parts by mass)
The following photopolymerization initiator (V-3): 1.0 part by mass The following solvent (X-1): 7.2 parts by mass The following solvent (X-2): 0.4 parts by mass-Surfactant (Z-1) below--0.006 parts by mass
 トリアリールメタン染料(I-1):下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Triarylmethane dye (I-1): Compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
 光重合性化合物(T-1):カヤラドDPHA(日本化薬(株)製、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレートとジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレートとの混合物)
 アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1):ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸(85/15[質量比]共重合体(重量平均分子量:12,000)のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート溶液(固形分40.0質量%)酸価(100mgKOH/g)
 光重合開始剤(V-3):下記構造のオキシム系化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
 溶剤(X-1):プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
 溶剤(X-2):3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル
界面活性剤(Z-1):メガファックF781-F(大日本インキ化学工業(株)製)
Photopolymerizable compound (T-1): Kayalad DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., a mixture of dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate and dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate)
Alkali-soluble binder (U-1): benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid (85/15 [mass ratio] copolymer (weight average molecular weight: 12,000) in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solution (solid content: 40.0 mass%) Acid value (100mgKOH / g)
Photopolymerization initiator (V-3): an oxime compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Solvent (X-1): Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate Solvent (X-2): Ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate surfactant (Z-1): Megafac F781-F (manufactured by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.)
<実施例2~27>
 トリアリールメタン染料(I-1)を下記(I-2)~(I-21)、(I-101)~(I-106)に変更したこと以外は実施例1と同様に着色組成物を調製した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
<Examples 2 to 27>
A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the triarylmethane dye (I-1) was changed to the following (I-2) to (I-21) and (I-101) to (I-106). Prepared.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
<実施例28>
 実施例1で用いたアルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1)を以下のアルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1-1)に変更した以外は実施例1と同様に着色組成物を調製した。
アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1-1):ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸/アリルメタクリレート(20/60/20)[質量比]共重合体(重量平均分子量:20,000)のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート溶液(固形分40.0質量%)酸価(250mgKOH/g)
<Example 28>
A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the alkali-soluble binder (U-1) used in Example 1 was changed to the following alkali-soluble binder (U-1-1).
Alkali-soluble binder (U-1-1): benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / allyl methacrylate (20/60/20) [mass ratio] copolymer (weight average molecular weight: 20,000) in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solution ( Solid content 40.0% by mass) Acid value (250 mgKOH / g)
<実施例29>
 実施例1で用いたアルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1)を以下のアルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-2-1)に変更した以外は実施例1と同様に着色組成物を調製した。
アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-2-1):GMA-MAA/メタクリル酸/シクロヘキシルメタクリレート (26/38/36)[質量比]共重合体(重量平均分子量:3,000)のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート溶液(固形分40.0質量%)酸価(125mgKOH/g)
 なお、GMA-MAAは以下の構造を示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
<Example 29>
A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the alkali-soluble binder (U-1) used in Example 1 was changed to the following alkali-soluble binder (U-2-1).
Alkali-soluble binder (U-2-1): GMA-MAA / methacrylic acid / cyclohexyl methacrylate (26/38/36) [mass ratio] copolymer (weight average molecular weight: 3,000) in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solution (Solid content: 40.0% by mass) Acid value (125 mgKOH / g)
GMA-MAA has the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
<実施例30>
 実施例1で用いたアルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1)を以下のアルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1-2)に変更した以外は実施例1と同様に着色組成物を調製した。
アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-1-2):ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸/アリルメタクリレート/N-フェニルマレイミド(15/20/30/35)[質量比]共重合体(重量平均分子量:20,000)のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート溶液(固形分40.0質量%)酸価(110mgKOH/g)
<Example 30>
A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the alkali-soluble binder (U-1) used in Example 1 was changed to the following alkali-soluble binder (U-1-2).
Alkali-soluble binder (U-1-2): benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / allyl methacrylate / N-phenylmaleimide (15/20/30/35) [mass ratio] copolymer (weight average molecular weight: 20,000) Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solution (solid content: 40.0% by mass) Acid value (110 mgKOH / g)
<比較例1>
 トリアリールメタン染料をWO2010-123071号公報の実施例2に記載の下記比較化合物1に変更したこと以外は実施例1と同様に着色組成物を調整した。
比較化合物1
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
<Comparative Example 1>
A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the triarylmethane dye was changed to the following Comparative Compound 1 described in Example 2 of WO2010-127301.
Comparative compound 1
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
<比較例2>
 トリアリールメタン染料を下記比較化合物2に変更したこと以外は実施例1と同様に着色組成物を調整した。
比較化合物2:(東京化成工業社製、製品名 ベーシックブルー7)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
<Comparative example 2>
A colored composition was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the triarylmethane dye was changed to the following Comparative Compound 2.
Comparative compound 2: (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., product name Basic Blue 7)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
<着色組成物による着色膜の作製>
 上記で得られた着色組成物を、100mm×100mmのガラス基板(1737、コーニング社製)上に、600~700nmにおける最大吸光度が1.5~2.0となるように塗布し、100℃のオーブンで180秒間乾燥させ、基板上に着色膜を作製した。
<Preparation of colored film with colored composition>
The colored composition obtained above was applied onto a 100 mm × 100 mm glass substrate (1737, manufactured by Corning) so that the maximum absorbance at 600 to 700 nm was 1.5 to 2.0. It was dried in an oven for 180 seconds to produce a colored film on the substrate.
 上記で得られた着色膜について下記の評価を行なった。
<耐熱性>
 上記着色膜に対し、230℃で40分加熱した後、色度変化、即ちΔEab値を測定した。ΔEab値は加熱前後のUV-Visスペクトルから算出した。ΔEab値の小さい方が耐光性に優れることを示す。
The following evaluation was performed about the colored film obtained above.
<Heat resistance>
The colored film was heated at 230 ° C. for 40 minutes, and then the chromaticity change, that is, the ΔEab value was measured. The ΔEab value was calculated from UV-Vis spectra before and after heating. A smaller ΔEab value indicates better light resistance.
<耐溶剤性(色度差)>
 230℃で20分加熱した上記着色膜を、25℃のNMP(N-メチルピロリドン)中に、10分間、浸積し、浸漬前後での色度を測定し、色変化の指標ΔEabを算出した。ΔEab値は加熱前後のUV-Visスペクトルから算出した。なお、ΔEabの値が3以下の場合に、色相変化が少なく、優れた耐溶剤性を有するものとした。
<Solvent resistance (color difference)>
The colored film heated at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes was immersed in NMP (N-methylpyrrolidone) at 25 ° C. for 10 minutes, and the chromaticity before and after immersion was measured to calculate a color change index ΔEab. . The ΔEab value was calculated from UV-Vis spectra before and after heating. In addition, when the value of ΔEab was 3 or less, the hue change was small and the solvent resistance was excellent.
<電圧保持率>
 ITO電極つきのガラス基板(商品名:1737 コーニング社製)上に、着色組成物を乾燥後の膜厚2.0μmとなるように塗布し、90℃のオーブンで60秒乾燥(プリベーク)した。その後、マスクを介さずに100mJ/cm2の露光(照度は20mW/cm2)をし、アルカリ現像液(商品名:CDK-1、富士フィルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)の1%水溶液を用いて25℃で現像し、水洗、乾燥後の塗布膜を230℃のオーブンで30分間加熱処理(ポストベーク)し、着色硬化膜を形成した。次いで、この着色硬化膜を形成した基板とITO電極を所定形状に蒸着しただけの基板とを、5μmのガラスビーズを混合したシール剤で貼り合わせたのち、基板間にメルク製液晶MJ971189(商品名)を注入して、液晶セルを作製した。
 次いで、液晶セルを70℃の恒温層に48時間入れた後、液晶セルの電圧保持率を、東陽テクニカ製液晶電圧保持率測定システムVHR-1A型(商品名)を用いて下記の測定条件により測定し、下記基準に示す点数により評価した。点数が高いほど電圧保持率は良好である。
測定条件
・電極間距離 :5μm~15μm
・印加電圧パルス振幅 :5V
・印加電圧パルス周波数:60Hz
・印加電圧パルス幅 :16.67msec
*電圧保持率:16.7ミリ秒後の液晶セル電位差/0ミリ秒で印加した電圧の値
*判定法
90%以上 :5
85%以上90%未満 :4
80%以上85%未満 :3
75%以上80%未満 :2
75%未満 :1
<Voltage holding ratio>
The colored composition was applied onto a glass substrate with an ITO electrode (trade name: 1737 manufactured by Corning) to a thickness of 2.0 μm after drying, and dried (prebaked) in an oven at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds. Thereafter, exposure was performed at 100 mJ / cm 2 without using a mask (illuminance was 20 mW / cm 2 ), and a 1% aqueous solution of an alkali developer (trade name: CDK-1, manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.) was used. It was developed at 25 ° C., washed with water and dried, and the coated film was heat-treated (post-baked) in an oven at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes to form a colored cured film. Next, the substrate on which this colored cured film is formed and the substrate on which ITO electrodes are simply deposited in a predetermined shape are bonded together with a sealant mixed with 5 μm glass beads, and then Merck liquid crystal MJ971118 (trade name) ) Was injected to prepare a liquid crystal cell.
Next, after putting the liquid crystal cell in a constant temperature layer at 70 ° C. for 48 hours, the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal cell was measured using the liquid crystal voltage holding ratio measuring system VHR-1A type (trade name) manufactured by Toyo Technica under the following measurement conditions. It measured and evaluated by the score shown to the following reference | standard. The higher the score, the better the voltage holding ratio.
Measurement conditions / Distance between electrodes: 5 μm to 15 μm
・ Applied voltage pulse amplitude: 5V
・ Applied voltage pulse frequency: 60 Hz
・ Applied voltage pulse width: 16.67 msec
* Voltage holding ratio: liquid crystal cell potential difference after 16.7 milliseconds / value of voltage applied in 0 milliseconds * judgment method 90% or more: 5
85% or more and less than 90%: 4
80% or more and less than 85%: 3
75% or more and less than 80%: 2
Less than 75%: 1
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000069
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000069
 上記結果から、本発明では、耐熱性、耐溶剤性および電圧保持率に優れた着色組成物を提供できることがわかった。
 一方、比較例の着色組成物では、耐熱性、耐溶剤性および電圧保持率が良好ではないことがわかった。
From the above results, it was found that the present invention can provide a colored composition having excellent heat resistance, solvent resistance and voltage holding ratio.
On the other hand, it was found that the heat resistance, solvent resistance, and voltage holding ratio were not good in the colored composition of the comparative example.

Claims (15)

  1. 架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造と対アニオンを含む着色剤と、重合性化合物を含む、着色組成物。 A coloring composition comprising a colorant comprising a triarylmethane structure having a crosslinkable group and a cation and having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and a counter anion, and a polymerizable compound.
  2. 前記架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造が、一般式(TP1)および/または一般式(TP2)で表される、請求項1に記載の着色組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す;Rtp5、Rtp6、Rtp8、Rtp9及びRtp11は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表す;Rtp7は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基又はNRtp71Rtp72を表す;Rtp71及びRtp72は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す;Rtp10は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す;a、b及びcは、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表す;a、b及びcが2以上の場合、Rtp6、Rtp7及びRtp8のうち2つは、互いに、連結して環を形成してもよい;Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかに架橋性基を有する。
    The coloring composition according to claim 1, wherein the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less and having a crosslinkable group and a cation is represented by the general formula (TP1) and / or the general formula (TP2);
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are each Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 ; Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; when a, b and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 And Rtp 8 may be linked to each other to form a ring; any one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a crosslinkable group.
  3. 対アニオンが、フッ素アニオン、塩素アニオン、臭素アニオン、ヨウ素アニオン、シアン化物イオン、過塩素酸アニオン、ボレートアニオン、PF6-およびSbF6-から選択される少なくとも1種、ならびに、
    -SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、下記一般式(A1)で表される構造および下記一般式(A2)で表される構造から選択される少なくとも1種から選択される、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物;
    一般式(A1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-または-CO-を表す;
    一般式(A2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    一般式(A2)中、R3は、-SO2-または-CO-を表す;R4およびR5はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-、-CO-または-CNを表す。
    At least one selected from the group consisting of a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, a borate anion, PF 6− and SbF 6− , and
    -SO 3 -, -COO -, -PO 4 -, is selected from at least one selected from structures represented by the structure and the following general formula represented by the following general formula (A1) (A2), wherein Item 3. The coloring composition according to Item 1 or 2;
    General formula (A1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    In general formula (A1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents —SO 2 — or —CO—;
    General formula (A2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    In general formula (A2), R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—; R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.
  4. 前記対アニオンが架橋性基を含む化合物中に含まれる、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the counter anion is contained in a compound containing a crosslinkable group.
  5. 前記対アニオンが繰り返し単位中に含まれる、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the counter anion is contained in a repeating unit.
  6. 前記架橋性基とカチオンを有する分子量2000以下のトリアリールメタン構造が、一般式(TP1A)または一般式(TP2A)で表される、請求項1に記載の着色組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す;Rtp5、Rtp6、Rtp8、Rtp9及びRtp11は、それぞれ独立して置換基を表す;Rtp7は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基又はNRtp71Rtp72を表す;Rtp71及びRtp72は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す;Rtp10は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す;a、b及びcは、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表す;a、b及びcが2以上の場合、Rtp6、Rtp7及びRtp8のうち2つは、互いに、連結して環を形成してもよい;Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかに架橋性基を有する;Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P)で置換されていてもよい;
    一般式(P)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    一般式(P)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、X1は-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、下記一般式(A1)で表される構造を含む基および下記一般式(A2)で表される構造を含む基から選択される少なくとも1種から選択される;
    一般式(A1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-または-CO-を表す;
    一般式(A2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
    一般式(A2)中、R3は、-SO2-または-CO-を表す。R4およびR5はそれぞれ独立して-SO2-、-CO-または-CNを表す。
    The coloring composition according to claim 1, wherein the triarylmethane structure having a molecular weight of 2000 or less having a crosslinkable group and a cation is represented by the general formula (TP1A) or the general formula (TP2A);
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    In general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are each Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 ; Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; when a, b and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 And two of Rtp 8 may be bonded to each other to form a ring; any of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a crosslinkable group; Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp At least one of 71 and Rtp 72 may be substituted with general formula (P);
    General formula (P)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    In general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and X 1 includes —SO 3 , —COO , —PO 4 , and a structure represented by the following general formula (A1). Selected from at least one selected from a group and a group containing a structure represented by the following general formula (A2);
    General formula (A1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    In general formula (A1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents —SO 2 — or —CO—;
    General formula (A2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
    In general formula (A2), R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—. R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.
  7. 光重合開始剤をさらに含む、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator.
  8. カラーフィルタの着色層形成用である、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is used for forming a colored layer of a color filter.
  9. 請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を硬化してなる着色硬化膜。 A colored cured film obtained by curing the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  10. 請求項9に記載の着色硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ。 A color filter having the colored cured film according to claim 9.
  11. 請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を支持体上に付与して着色組成物層を形成する工程と、上記着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程とを含むカラーフィルタの製造方法。 A step of forming a colored composition layer by applying the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8 on a support, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, and an unexposed state And a step of developing and removing the portion to form a colored pattern.
  12. 請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を支持体上に付与して着色組成物層を形成し、硬化して着色層を形成する工程、前記着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、露光および現像することにより前記フォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、もしくは前記レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして前記着色層をドライエッチングする工程を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。 A step of applying the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8 on a support to form a colored composition layer and curing to form a colored layer, a photoresist layer on the colored layer A method for producing a color filter, comprising: a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, or a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
  13. 請求項11または12に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法によって製造したカラーフィルタ。 The color filter manufactured by the manufacturing method of the color filter of Claim 11 or 12.
  14. 請求項10に記載のカラーフィルタまたは請求項11または12に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により作製されたカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。 The solid-state image sensor which has a color filter produced by the manufacturing method of the color filter of Claim 10, or the color filter of Claim 11 or 12.
  15. 請求項10に記載のカラーフィルタまたは請求項11または12に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により作製されたカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。 An image display device comprising the color filter according to claim 10 or the color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to claim 11 or 12.
PCT/JP2014/070442 2013-09-30 2014-08-04 Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state imaging element, and liquid crystal display device WO2015045622A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201480052638.8A CN105593311B (en) 2013-09-30 2014-08-04 Coloured composition, coloring cured film, colored filter and its manufacturing method, solid photographic element and image display device
KR1020167008124A KR101855237B1 (en) 2013-09-30 2014-08-04 Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state imaging element, and liquid crystal display device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-204925 2013-09-30
JP2013204925 2013-09-30
JP2013-262313 2013-12-19
JP2013262313A JP6147181B2 (en) 2013-09-30 2013-12-19 Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and liquid crystal display device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015045622A1 true WO2015045622A1 (en) 2015-04-02

Family

ID=52742778

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/070442 WO2015045622A1 (en) 2013-09-30 2014-08-04 Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state imaging element, and liquid crystal display device

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6147181B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101855237B1 (en)
CN (1) CN105593311B (en)
TW (1) TWI634162B (en)
WO (1) WO2015045622A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2017110187A (en) * 2015-12-15 2017-06-22 東友ファインケム株式会社Dongwoo Fine−Chem Co., Ltd. Compound and coloring composition
CN108026380A (en) * 2015-09-28 2018-05-11 富士胶片株式会社 New compound, dyeing or printing and dyeing are with coloured composition, ink-jet cloth printing with ink, the method printed and dyed to cloth and silk and the cloth and silk for being colored or printing and dyeing
EP3357976A4 (en) * 2015-09-28 2018-08-08 FUJIFILM Corporation Novel compound, coloring composition for dyeing or printing, ink for inkjet printing, method of printing on cloth, and dyed or printed cloth
WO2018194002A1 (en) * 2017-04-17 2018-10-25 山本化成株式会社 Triarylmethane-based compound

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6931575B2 (en) * 2016-11-16 2021-09-08 東友ファインケム株式会社Dongwoo Fine−Chem Co., Ltd. Coloring composition, coloring curable resin composition, color filter and liquid crystal display device
CN108333872B (en) * 2017-01-19 2021-06-29 东友精细化工有限公司 Colored photosensitive resin composition for green pixel, color filter and application thereof

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010204132A (en) * 2008-02-27 2010-09-16 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Coloring resin composition for color filter, color filter, organic el display and liquid crystal display
JP2011068866A (en) * 2009-08-26 2011-04-07 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Coloring composition, color filter, organic el display and liquid crystal display
JP2012201694A (en) * 2011-03-23 2012-10-22 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Dye, colored resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device
JP2013010814A (en) * 2011-06-28 2013-01-17 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Triarylmethane dye having polymerizable double bond, polymeric compound having triarylmethane dye on side chain, coloring composition for color filter, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device
JP2013025194A (en) * 2011-07-22 2013-02-04 Jsr Corp Colorant, coloring composition, color filter and display element
WO2013141156A1 (en) * 2012-03-19 2013-09-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored radiation-sensitive composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for forming colored pattern, method for manufacturing color filter, solid state image sensor, and image display device
JP2014118542A (en) * 2012-12-19 2014-06-30 Adeka Corp Novel compound and color photosensitive composition
JP2014130281A (en) * 2012-12-28 2014-07-10 Jsr Corp Colored composition, color filter and display element

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101298884B1 (en) * 2008-02-27 2013-08-21 미쓰비시 가가꾸 가부시키가이샤 Coloring resin composition for color filter, color filter, organic el display and liquid crystal display
TWI444441B (en) * 2009-09-25 2014-07-11 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Coloring composition and color filter
JP5573724B2 (en) * 2011-02-18 2014-08-20 Jsr株式会社 Coloring composition, color filter and display element

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010204132A (en) * 2008-02-27 2010-09-16 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Coloring resin composition for color filter, color filter, organic el display and liquid crystal display
JP2011068866A (en) * 2009-08-26 2011-04-07 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Coloring composition, color filter, organic el display and liquid crystal display
JP2012201694A (en) * 2011-03-23 2012-10-22 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Dye, colored resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device
JP2013010814A (en) * 2011-06-28 2013-01-17 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Triarylmethane dye having polymerizable double bond, polymeric compound having triarylmethane dye on side chain, coloring composition for color filter, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device
JP2013025194A (en) * 2011-07-22 2013-02-04 Jsr Corp Colorant, coloring composition, color filter and display element
WO2013141156A1 (en) * 2012-03-19 2013-09-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored radiation-sensitive composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for forming colored pattern, method for manufacturing color filter, solid state image sensor, and image display device
JP2014118542A (en) * 2012-12-19 2014-06-30 Adeka Corp Novel compound and color photosensitive composition
JP2014130281A (en) * 2012-12-28 2014-07-10 Jsr Corp Colored composition, color filter and display element

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108026380A (en) * 2015-09-28 2018-05-11 富士胶片株式会社 New compound, dyeing or printing and dyeing are with coloured composition, ink-jet cloth printing with ink, the method printed and dyed to cloth and silk and the cloth and silk for being colored or printing and dyeing
EP3357976A4 (en) * 2015-09-28 2018-08-08 FUJIFILM Corporation Novel compound, coloring composition for dyeing or printing, ink for inkjet printing, method of printing on cloth, and dyed or printed cloth
EP3357975A4 (en) * 2015-09-28 2019-02-13 FUJIFILM Corporation Novel compound, coloring composition for dyeing or printing, ink for inkjet printing, method of printing on cloth, and dyed or printed cloth
US10662332B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-05-26 Fujifilm Corporation Compound, coloring composition for dyeing or textile printing, ink for ink jet textile printing, method of printing on fabric, and dyed or printed fabric
JP2017110187A (en) * 2015-12-15 2017-06-22 東友ファインケム株式会社Dongwoo Fine−Chem Co., Ltd. Compound and coloring composition
WO2018194002A1 (en) * 2017-04-17 2018-10-25 山本化成株式会社 Triarylmethane-based compound
JPWO2018194002A1 (en) * 2017-04-17 2020-05-14 山本化成株式会社 Triarylmethane compounds
JP7159152B2 (en) 2017-04-17 2022-10-24 山本化成株式会社 triarylmethane compounds

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN105593311A (en) 2016-05-18
TW201512315A (en) 2015-04-01
KR20160047561A (en) 2016-05-02
JP6147181B2 (en) 2017-06-14
KR101855237B1 (en) 2018-05-08
JP2015092217A (en) 2015-05-14
CN105593311B (en) 2018-06-12
TWI634162B (en) 2018-09-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6086885B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device and compound
JP6129728B2 (en) Colored curable composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and triarylmethane compound
JP6396166B2 (en) Colored curable composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6251208B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and liquid crystal display device
WO2015141536A1 (en) Colored curable resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state image sensor, image display device, compound, and cation
JP5714929B2 (en) Colored curable composition and color filter
JP6147181B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and liquid crystal display device
JP5914379B2 (en) Colored curable composition and color filter
JP6283694B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, method for producing color filter, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR20150112807A (en) Colored curable composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device
JP2016133604A (en) Colored composition for color filter and color filter
JP6461304B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and polymer
JP5885543B2 (en) Colored curable composition and color filter
JP2013182215A (en) Curable coloring composition and color filter
JP2015069052A (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, manufacturing method of color filter, solid state imaging element, and liquid crystal display device
WO2015093501A1 (en) Colored composition, manufacturing method for colored composition, cured film, color filter, manufacturing method for color filter, solid state imaging element, and image display device
JP6457413B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and polymer
JP2012167145A (en) Colored curable composition, and color filter
JP2011225806A (en) Colored curable composition, color filter and method for producing the same, and liquid crystal display element
WO2017026473A1 (en) Color composition, cured film, color filter, process for producing color filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and polymer
JP2018013668A (en) Color filter coloring composition and color filter

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14849076

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20167008124

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14849076

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1